2017 RAM Commercial Chassis Cab Owner's Manual Chassis4500
User Manual: 2017-chassis4500
Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 536
Download | |
Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
2017 OWNER’S MANUAL Chassis Cab VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation. This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured. WARNING! Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive. Copyright © 2016 FCA US LLC SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 3 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 4 5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 5 6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 6 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 7 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 8 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511 9 10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517 10 INTRODUCTION CONTENTS 䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . . .7 䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . . .7 䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 䡵 VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 1 4 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality. This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle. It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle. If applicable, refer to the Diesel Supplement for diesel related information. NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain with the vehicle when sold. When it comes to service, remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about your satisfaction. HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire. Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment. The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects. Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner’s Manual: INTRODUCTION 5 1 6 INTRODUCTION WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision, bodily injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions. VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not apply to body modifications or special equipment installed by van conversion/camper manufacturers/body builders. U.S. residents refer to the Warranty Information book, Section 2.1.C. Canadian residents refer to the “What Is Not Covered” section of the Warranty Information book. Such equipment includes video monitors, VCRs, heaters, stoves, refrigerators, etc. For warranty coverage and service on these items, contact the applicable manufacturer. Operating instructions for the special equipment installed by the conversion/camper manufacturer should also be supplied with your vehicle. If these instructions are missing, please contact your authorized dealer for assistance in obtaining replacement documents from the applicable manufacturer. For information on the Body Builder’s Guide refer to www.rambodybuilder.com. This website contains dimensional and technical specifications for your vehicle. It is intended for Second Stage Manufacturer’s technical support. For service issues, contact your authorized dealer. INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through the windshield. This number also appears on the vehicle frame and underbody as well as the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the vehicle registration and title. Vehicle Identification Number NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN. VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS WARNING! Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death. 1 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 2 CONTENTS 䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 ▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 ▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) And Key Fob — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 ▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 ▫ Keyless Push Button Ignition And Key Fob — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 ▫ Emergency Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 ▫ Removing Key Fob From The (WIN) Ignition . . .15 ▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 䡵 SENTRY KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 ▫ Replacement Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 ▫ Customer Key Fob Programming . . . . . . . . . . . .19 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 ▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 ▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . . .21 䡵 ILLUMINATED APPROACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 ▫ Remote Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 ▫ To Lock The Doors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 ▫ Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock . . . . . . . . . .25 ▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 ▫ Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . .25 ▫ Key Fob Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . .28 ▫ How To Use Remote Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ▫ Remote Start Abort Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . .41 ▫ To Enter Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 ▫ Occupant Restraint Systems Features . . . . . . . . .41 ▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 ▫ Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 ▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 ▫ Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped . . .30 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 ▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 ▫ Power Door Locks — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .32 ▫ Child-Protection Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE ENTRY . . . . .35 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 ▫ Power Windows — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 ▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 ▫ Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 ▫ Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) . . . . . . . . .55 ▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 ▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .90 ▫ Diesel Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 ▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 ▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 ▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 ▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Your vehicle uses either a key start ignition system or keyless ignition system. The key start ignition system consists of a either a Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) system, or a Keyless Push Button Ignition system. 2 Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) And Key Fob — If Equipped The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similar to an ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three with detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START position is a spring-loaded momentary contact position. When released from the START position, the switch automatically returns to the ON/RUN position. Wireless Ignition Switch 1 2 3 4 — OFF — ACC (ACCESSORY) — ON/RUN — START 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) Key Fob The key fob operates the ignition switch. Insert the square end of the key fob into the ignition switch located on the instrument panel and rotate to the desired position. The WIN key fob also contains an emergency key which is stored in the rear of the key fob. Keyless Push Button Ignition And Key Fob — If Equipped This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button as long as the Remote Keyless Entry key fob is in the passenger compartment. The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating positions; three of which are labeled and will illuminate when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start RUN will illuminate. NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with the push of a button, the key fob may have a low or dead battery. In this situation, a back up method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the key fob against the ENGINE START/STOP button, with your foot applied on the brake pedal, and push to operate the ignition switch. Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) Key Fob THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 Keyless Push Button Ignition Key Fob This Keyless Push Button Ignition key fob allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button, as long as the Remote Keyless Entry key fob is in the passenger compartment. The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start RUN will illuminate. It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry key fob and an emergency key, which stores in the rear of the key fob. Keyless Push Button Ignition 1 — OFF 2 — ACC (ACCESSORY) 3 — ON/RUN Keyless Push Button Ignition Key Fob 2 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Emergency Key Removal Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) Key Fob — If Equipped The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the key fob go dead. You can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking. To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch at the top of the key fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand. NOTE: When using the emergency key to gain access to your vehicle, be aware that the security alarm may be triggered. Insert the key fob into the ignition and place the ignition in the ON/RUN mode to disarm the security system. WIN Key Fob Keyless Push Button Ignition Key Fob — If Equipped The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or the key fob go dead. You can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking. To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch on the backside of the key fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 NOTE: When using the emergency key to gain access to your vehicle, be aware that the security alarm may be triggered. Insert the key fob into the ignition and place the ignition in the ON/RUN mode to disarm the security system. Removing Key Fob From The (WIN) Ignition 2 Key Fob With Remote Keyless Entry (WIN) Place the gear selector in PARK (if equipped with an automatic transmission). Turn the key fob to the OFF position and then remove the key fob. Keyless Push Button Key Fob NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key into the door lock cylinder with either side up. 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: • The power window switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. • For vehicles not equipped with a touchscreen radio, refer to “Instrument Cluster Display⬙ in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. • For vehicles equipped with a touchscreen radio, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. WARNING! • Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic transmission into PARK or the manual transmission into REVERSE, apply the parking brake, turn the vehicle OFF, remove the key fobs from vehicle, and lock all doors. and lock your vehicle. If equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, always make sure the keyless ignition node is in “OFF” mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle. (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector. • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector. • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. • Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 CAUTION! • If your vehicle battery becomes low or dead, your key fobs will become locked in the ignition. • Do not attempt to remove the key fobs while in this condition, damage could occur to the key fobs or ignition module. Only remove the emergency key for locking and unlocking the doors. • Leave the key fobs in the ignition and either: • Jump Start the vehicle. • Charge the battery. CAUTION! An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. Key-In-Ignition Reminder Opening the driver’s door when the key fob is in the ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC, a chime will sound to remind you to remove the key fob. NOTE: • ⬙Keyed⬙ Ignition systems will chime in OFF or ACC when the driver door is open. • “Keyless⬙ Ignition systems will chime in ACC or RUN when the driver door is open. • The instrument cluster display will display “Key In Ignition.” General Information The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 2 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE SENTRY KEY The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked. The system uses a key fob, an Ignition Node Module, Keyless Push Button Ignition and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine to crank if an invalid key fob is used to start and operate the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an invalid key fob is used to start the engine. NOTE: A key fob that has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key. During normal operation, after placing the keyless ignition in the ON/RUN position, the vehicle security light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid key fob to try to start the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds. If the vehicle security light turns on during normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by an authorized dealer. CAUTION! The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection. All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 Replacement Key Fobs Customer Key Fob Programming NOTE: Only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle. Programming key fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer. CAUTION! • Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended. • For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in the OFF position. NOTE: Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank key fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one that has never been programmed. When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized dealer. General Information The following regulatory statement applies to all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 2 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM To Arm The System The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle doors and ignition for unauthorized operation. When the vehicle security alarm is activated, interior switches for door locks are disabled. The system provides both audible and visible signals for the first three minutes. The horn will sound, the headlights will turn on, the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash and vehicle security light will flash repeatedly. For an additional 15 minutes only, the headlights will turn on, the park lamps and/or turn signals, and vehicle security light will flash. Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security alarm: Rearming Of The System 2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the vehicle: • Push lock button on the interior power door lock switch with the driver and/or passenger door open. • Push the lock button on the exterior Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid key fob available in the same exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter- N-Go — Passive Entry⬙ in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further information). • Push the lock button on the key fob. The vehicle security alarm will rearm itself after the 15 additional minutes of headlights and vehicle security light flashing, if the system has not been disabled. If the condition which initiated the alarm is still present, the system will ignore that condition and monitor the remaining doors and ignition. 1. Remove the key from the ignition system (refer to ⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating⬙ for further information). • For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition, make sure the vehicle ignition system is ⬙OFF.⬙ • For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition, make sure the vehicle ignition system is ⬙OFF⬙ and the key is physically removed from the ignition. 3. If any doors are open, close them. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 The vehicle security alarm will set when you use the power door locks, or use the key fob to lock the doors. After all the doors are locked and closed, the vehicle security light, in the instrument panel cluster, will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to indicate that the alarm is being set. After the alarm is set, the vehicle security light will flash at a slower rate to indicate that the system is armed. To Disarm The System The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed using any of the following methods: 1. Push the unlock button on the key fob. 2. Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle with a valid key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the passive entry door handle. If equipped, refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry⬙ in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further information. 3. Cycle the ignition out of the OFF position. • For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition, push the Keyless Ignition START/STOP button (requires at least one valid key fob in the vehicle). • For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn the key to the ON position. The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect your vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the vehicle security alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the vehicle security alarm. If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected, the vehicle security alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the vehicle security alarm. Security System Manual Override The vehicle security alarm will not arm if you lock the doors using the manual door lock plunger. 2 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ILLUMINATED APPROACH The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the key fob to unlock the doors or open any door. This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information. The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds, or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position. The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy lights will not turn off if the dimmer control is in the “Dome ON” position (rotate horizontal thumb wheel on the bottom of the switch to the far right detent position). The illuminated entry system will not operate if the dimmer control is in the “Dome OFF” position (rotate horizontal thumb wheel on the bottom of the switch to the far left detent position). NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with illuminated approach lights under the outside mirrors, they can be turned off by using the instrument cluster display controls (if NOT equipped with a touchscreen radio) or the Uconnect radio (if equipped with a touchscreen radio). Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” or “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY The Remote Keyless Entry system allows you to lock or unlock all doors, tailgate, and the RamBox (if equipped) as well as activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held radio key fob with integrated key. The key fob does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system. Push and release the LOCK button on the key fob to lock all doors, the tailgate and the RamBox (if equipped). The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 NOTE: Inserting the key fob into the ignition switch disables the system from responding to any button pushes from that key fob. Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables the system from responding to all key fob buttons for all key fobs. 2 Keyless Push Button Ignition Key Fob Remote Unlock The Doors Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) Key Fob Push and release the unlock button on the key fob once to unlock the driver’s door. Push the unlock button twice within five seconds to unlock all doors, the tailgate and the RamBox (if equipped). The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on. NOTE: The instrument cluster display or Uconnect Settings are setup for driver door first, otherwise this will unlock all doors. 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors First Flash Lamps With Remote Key Lock This feature lets you program the system to unlock either the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the UNLOCK button on the key fob. To change the current setting, proceed as follows: This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, proceed as follows: • For vehicles not equipped with a touchscreen radio, refer to Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. • For vehicles not equipped with a touchscreen radio, refer to Settings/Customer-Programmable Features in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. • For vehicles equipped with a touchscreen radio, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. • For vehicles equipped with a touchscreen radio, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. NOTE: Pushing the LOCK button on the key fob while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm System. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm System activated will cause the alarm to sound. Push the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm System. To Lock The Doors Push and release the lock button on the key fob to lock all doors, the tailgate and the RamBox (if equipped). The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the key fob. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, proceed as follows: • For vehicles not equipped with a touchscreen radio, refer to Settings/Customer-Programmable Features in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. • For vehicles equipped with a touchscreen radio, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. button on the key fob NOTE: Pushing the LOCK while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm System. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Alarm System activated will cause the alarm to button to deactivate the sound. Push the UNLOCK Vehicle Security Alarm System. Using The Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF, push and hold the PANIC button on the key fob for at least one second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the headlights will turn on, the park lights will flash, the horn will pulse on and off, and the turn signal lights will flash. The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by either pushing the PANIC button a second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) or greater. NOTE: • The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while the Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and horn will remain on. • You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the vehicle when using the key fob to turn off the Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted by the system. Programming Additional Key Fobs If you do not have a programmed key fob, contact your authorized dealer for details. 2 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Key Fob Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032 battery. NOTE: • Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate • Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back housing or the printed circuit board. 1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical latch on the back of the key fob sideways with your thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand. Emergency Key Removal Emergency Key Removal THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 2. Separating key fob halves requires screw removal – if equipped, and gently prying the two halves of the key fob apart. Make sure not to damage the seal during removal. 2 Separating Key Fob Case Remove Screw From Key Fob Case 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE General Information The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Separating Key Fob Case 3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over (battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol. 4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two halves together, reposition and secure the screw as shown in step #2 for removal. NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED This system uses the key fob to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security. The system has a range of approximately 300 ft (91 m). NOTE: • The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 • Obstructions between the vehicle and the key fob may reduce this range. How To Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start: • Gear selector in PARK • Doors closed • Hood closed WARNING! • Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled. • Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other controls could cause serious injury or death. • HAZARD switch off Remote Start Abort Message • BRAKE switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed) • Ignition key removed from ignition switch The following messages will display in the instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prematurely: • Battery at an acceptable charge level • Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open • PANIC button not pushed • Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open • Fuel meets minimum requirement • Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low • System not disabled from previous remote start event • Remote Start Cancelled — System Fault • Vehicle security alarm not active • Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset The instrument cluster display message stays active until the ignition is turned to the ON/RUN position. 2 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE To Enter Remote Start Mode Push and release the Remote Start button on the key fob twice within five seconds. The parking lights will flash, vehicle doors will lock, and the horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Once the vehicle has started, the engine will run for 15 minutes. NOTE: • If your power door locks were unlocked, Remote Start will automatically lock the doors. • If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds. • The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Remote Start mode. • For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode. • The engine can be started two consecutive times (two 15-minute cycles) with the key fob. However, the ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN position before you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle. To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Vehicle Push and release the Remote Start button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle. NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system will disable the one time push of the Remote Start button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote Start request. To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, push and release the unlock button on the key fob to unlock the doors and disarm the vehicle security alarm system (if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle, cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped When Remote Start is activated, the heated steering wheel and driver heated seat features will automatically turn on in cold weather. In warm weather, the driver vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the remote start is activated. These features will stay on through the duration of Remote Start or until the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated and deactivated through the Uconnect System. Refer to ”Customer Programmable Features” in “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information on Remote Start Comfort System operation. DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks Front and rear doors may be locked by moving the lock knob down or unlocked by moving the lock knob up. General Information The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Door Lock Knob Front doors may be opened with the inside door handle without lifting the lock knob. Doors locked before closing will remain locked when closed. 2 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE The emergency key will unlock the driver door lock on your vehicle. WARNING! • Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. • For personal security and safety in the event of an collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle. • Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic transmission into PARK or the manual transmission into FIRST gear or REVERSE, apply the parking brake, turn the vehicle OFF, remove the key fobs from vehicle, and lock all doors. and lock your vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector. (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector. • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. Power Door Locks — If Equipped The power door lock switches are on each front door trim panel. Use these switches to lock or unlock the doors. NOTE: The key fob may not be found if it is located next to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device; these devices may block the key fob’s wireless signal. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer. The auto door lock feature is enabled/ disabled in the Uconnect Settings. Automatic Doors Unlock — If Equipped This feature unlocks all of the doors of the vehicle when either front door is opened. This will occur only after the vehicle has been shifted into the PARK position after the vehicle has been driven (shifted out of PARK and all doors closed). Automatic Doors Unlock Programming — If Equipped Power Door Lock Switches Location If you push the power door lock switch while the key fob is in the ignition, and any front door is open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents you from accidentally locking your key fob in the vehicle. Removing the key fob or closing the door will allow the locks to operate. A chime will sound if the key fob is in the ignition switch and a door is open, as a reminder to remove the key fob. Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto The Automatic Doors Unlock feature can be enabled or disabled as follows: • For vehicles not equipped with a touchscreen radio, refer to Settings/Customer-Programmable Features in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. • For vehicles equipped with a touchscreen radio, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. NOTE: Use the Auto Unlock Doors feature in accordance with local laws. 2 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Child-Protection Door Lock To provide a safer environment for children riding in the rear seat, the rear doors (if equipped) of your vehicle have the Child-Protection Door Lock system. Child Lock Control WARNING! Child-Protection Door Lock Location To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat blade screwdriver (or emergency key) and rotate the dial to engage and disengage the Child-Protection locks. When the system on a door is engaged, that door can only be opened by using the outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the unlocked position. Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision. Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are engaged. NOTE: • After setting the Child-Protection Door Lock system, always test the door from the inside to make certain it is in the desired position. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 • For emergency exit with the system engaged, move the door lock switch to the unlock position, roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle. KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE ENTRY The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and a feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons. • The vehicles security alarm can be armed/disarmed by pushing the passive entry key fob lock/unlock buttons (if equipped). • The key fob may not be found if it is located next to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device; these devices may block the key fob’s wireless signal. To Unlock From The Driver’s Side: With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver door handle, grab the front driver door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked. NOTE: • Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. • If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been raining/snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower response time. • If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock and if equipped will arm the security alarm. Grab The Door Handle To Unlock 2 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed, all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front driver’s door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. To Unlock From The Passenger Side: With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front passenger door handle to unlock all doors automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is unlocked. NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”). Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry Key Fob In Vehicle: To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF position. If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry key fobs. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs is detected inside the vehicle, and no other valid Passive Entry key fobs are detected outside the vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times (on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive Entry key fob can be locked in the vehicle). THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors: With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door handles, push the door handle lock button to lock all doors. 2 Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking NOTE: Push The Door Handle Button To Lock Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the door handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s). • After pushing the door handle lock button, you must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting and unlocking. • The Passive Entry system will not operate if the key fob battery is dead. The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the key fob lock button or the lock button located on the vehicle’s interior door panel. 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE General Information WINDOWS The following regulatory statement applies to all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: Power Windows — If Equipped This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Power Window Switches The power window controls located on the driver’s door trim panel have up—down switches that give you fingertip control of all power windows. There is a single opening and closing switch on the front passenger door for passenger window control and on the rear doors of the Crew Cab models. The windows will operate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN or ACC position, and for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is turned OFF or until a front door is opened. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 NOTE: The Key Off Power Delay feature will allow the power windows to operate for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is turned OFF. This feature is cancelled when either front door is opened. WARNING! Never leave children unattended in a vehicle. Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death. Auto-Down Both the driver and front passenger window switch have an Auto-Down feature. Push the window switch past the first detent, release, and the window will go down automatically. To cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate the switch in either the up or down direction and release the switch. To stop the window from going all the way down during the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly. To open the window part way, push to the switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop. Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection (4-Door Models Driver And Front Passenger Door Only) — If Equipped Pull the window switch fully upward to the second detent, release, and the window will go up automatically. To stop the window from going all the way up during the Auto-Up operation, push down on the switch briefly. To close the window part way, lift the window switch to the first detent and release when you want the window to stop. NOTE: If the window runs into any obstacle during the Auto-Closure, it will reverse direction and then go back down. Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to close the window. Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close the window manually. WARNING! There is no anti-pinch protection when the window is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the window before closing. 2 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Reset Auto-Up Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the window may need to be reset. To reset Auto-Up: 1. Make sure the door is fully closed. 2. Pull the window switch up to close the window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed. 3. Push the window switch down firmly to the second detent to open the window completely and continue to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after the window is fully open. Window Lockout Switch Window Lockout Switch (4–Door Models Only) Wind Buffeting The window lockout switch on the driver’s door allows you to disable the window control on the rear passenger doors. To disable the window controls on the rear passenger doors, push the window lock switch into the latched or down position. To enable the window controls, push the window lock switch again and return the switch to the released or up position. Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open, then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems: Occupant Restraint Systems Features • Seat Belt Systems • Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags • Child Restraints Some of the safety features described in this section may be standard equipment on some models, or may be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your authorized dealer. 2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint (refer to “Child Restraints” in this section for further information). 3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly (refer to “Child Restraints” in this section for further information) should be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat. Important Safety Precautions 4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm. Please pay close attention to the information in this section. It tells you how to use your restraint system properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible. 5. You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly. Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag: 6. All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly. 1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat. 7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the front air bags room to inflate. 2 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occupants and the door and occupants could be injured. 9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person, refer to the “If You Need Consumer Assistance” section for customer service contact information. WARNING! • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint. • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat. Seat Belt Systems Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver and could cause a collision that includes you. This can happen far away from home or on your own street. Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times. Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert) Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 Initial Indication If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert Warning Sequence The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants to buckle their seat belts. Change Of Status If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat belts are buckled again. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed. BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert. 2 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts are buckled. Lap/Shoulder Belts All seating positions except the Crew Cab front center seating position have combination lap/shoulder belts. The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle. WARNING! • Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have air bags. (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly. • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the driver, should always wear their seat belts whether or not an air bag is also provided at their seating position to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in the event of a crash. • Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too. (Continued) THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt. People belted together can crash into one another in a collision, hurting one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no matter what their size. • A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as possible and keep it snug. • A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed. • A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest you. • A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly. • A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision. • A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together. • A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision. (Continued) 2 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and adjust the seat. 3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” 2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your lap. Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle Pulling Out The Latch Plate THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision. 6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully. Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ shoulder belt. 1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point. 2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate. 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate. Positioning The Lap Belt 5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt. 4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted. 2 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage, and move it up or down to the position that serves you best. NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward position without pushing or squeezing the release button. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position. WARNING! Adjustable Anchorage As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position, and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position. • Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too. • Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt. • Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 First Row Center Seat Belt Operating Instructions (Regular Cab Only) The first row center seat belt (Regular Cab only) features a seat belt with a mini-latch plate and buckle, which allows the seat belt to detach from the lower anchor when the seat is folded. The latch plate and regular latch plate can then be stored out of the way in the seat for added convenience to open up utilization of the storage areas behind the front seats when the seat is not occupied. 2 1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular latch plate from its stowed position on the seat. In Use Position 2. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull the seat belt over the seat. 3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the right head restraint. 4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until you hear a “click.” Inserting Latch Plate 5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your lap. 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” 7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision. 8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the seat belt. 9. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the buckle. Detaching Buckle With Seat Belt Tongue 10. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the mini-buckle for storage, insert the regular latch plate into the center red slot on the mini-buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully. Insert the mini-latch plate and regular latch plate into its stowed position. • If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are not properly connected when the seat belt is used by an occupant, the seat belt will not be able to provide proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury in a collision. WARNING! (Continued) THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 WARNING! (Continued) • When reattaching the mini-latch plate and minibuckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not twisted. If the webbing is twisted, follow the preceding procedure to detach the mini-latch plate and minibuckle, untwist the webbing, and reattach the minilatch plate and mini-buckle. First Row Center Lap Belt Operating Instructions — If Equipped The center seating position for the Crew Cab front seat has a lap belt only. To buckle the lap belt, slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙ To lengthen the lap belt, tilt the latch plate and pull. To remove slack, pull the loose end of the webbing. Wear the lap belt snug against the hips. Sit back and upright in the seat, then adjust the seat belt as tightly as is comfortable. Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it must be removed. WARNING! • ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically required in order to properly fit the original seat belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the distance between the front edge of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches. • Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt is not long enough and only use in the recommended seating positions. Remove and store the Seat Belt Extender when not needed. 2 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Seat Belts And Pregnant Women Seat Belt Pretensioner — If Equipped The front seat belt system may be equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision. These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by removing slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints. NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly. Pregnant Women And Seat Belts Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt. Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck. Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm. The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately. Energy Management Feature — If Equipped This vehicle may be equipped with a seat belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions that may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a collision. The seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) — If Equipped The seat belts in the passenger seating positions may be equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system. For additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints” section of this manual. The figure below illustrates the locking feature for each seating position. 2 Crew Cab Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations Regular Cab Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations • ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor • ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙ 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat. WARNING! • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint. • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat. How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt. 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire seat belt is extracted. 3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode. How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode. WARNING! • The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual. • Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions. • Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children who are using booster seats. The locked mode is only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints that have a harness for restraining the child. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) • Seat Belt Pretensioners — If Equipped Some of the safety features described in this section may be standard equipment on some models, or may be optional equipment on others. If you are not sure, ask your authorized dealer. • Seat Belt Buckle Switch The air bag system must be ready to protect you in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with the electrical Air Bag System Components. Your vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag System Components: Air Bag System Components • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) • Air Bag Warning Light • Steering Wheel and Column • Instrument Panel • Knee Impact Bolsters • Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags • Supplemental Side Air Bags — If Equipped • Front and Side Impact Sensors — If Equipped Air Bag Warning Light The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate. The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment. The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on again after initial startup. 2 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction. While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately. • The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position. • The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight-second interval. • The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving. NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately. WARNING! Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bag system to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately. Front Air Bags This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The driver front air bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The passenger front air bag is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 WARNING! (Continued) • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint. • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat. Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations 1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags 2 — Driver/Passenger Knee Impact Bolsters WARNING! • Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during front air bag deployment could cause serious injury, including death. Air bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel. (Continued) The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive information from the front impact sensors (if equipped) or other system components. The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions. 2 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags. WARNING! • No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate. • Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually. You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional. The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating. • Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air bags. Front Air Bag Operation Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front air bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other hand, depending on the type and location of impact, front air bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration. Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed. Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, away from an inflating air bag. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air bags. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger. Knee Impact Bolsters Supplemental Side Air Bags — If Equipped Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags: 1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) (If Equipped): Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” label sewn into the outboard side of the seats. The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and front passenger, and position the front occupants for improved interaction with the front air bags. WARNING! • Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact bolsters in any way. • Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label 2 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE The SABs may help reduce the risk of head or other injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side impacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure. When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag. WARNING! Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects could be pushed into you, causing serious injury. 2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs) (If Equipped): Located above the side windows. The trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.” Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) Label Location SABICs may help reduce the risk of head or other injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side impacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure. The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 WARNING! • Do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows where the SABIC and its deployment path are located should remain free from any obstructions. • In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any accessory items in your vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the vehicle for any reason. The SABICs and SABs (Side Air Bags) (if equipped with Side Air Bags) are designed to activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular side impact or rollover event (if equipped with rollover sensing) is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed. Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to blink your eyes. WARNING! • Occupants, including children, who are up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or area where the side air bags inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint. • Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also help keep you in position, away from an inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit upright with their backs against the seats. Children must be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for the size of the child. • Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean against the door or window. Sit upright in the center of the seat. (Continued) 2 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) • Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed. • Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have Side Air Bags. NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment. Side Impacts — If Equipped With Side Air Bags In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact events. The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only. The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions, including some collisions at certain angles, or some side collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal collisions where the front air bags deploy. Rollover Events — If Equipped Side Air Bags Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should have deployed. The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover sensing-system determines if a rollover event may be in progress and whether deployment is appropriate. A slower-developing event may deploy the seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle. A faster-developing event may deploy the seat belt pretensioners as well as the Side Air Bags on both sides of the vehicle. The rollover sensing-system may also deploy the seat belt pretensioners, with or without the Side Air Bags, on both sides of the vehicle if the vehicle experiences a near rollover event. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain rollover (if equipped with rollover sensing) or side impact events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with electrical Air Bag System Components listed below: Air Bag System Components • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) • Air Bag Warning Light • Steering Wheel and Column • Instrument Panel • Knee Impact Bolsters • Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags • Supplemental Side Air Bags — If Equipped • Front and Side Impact Sensors — If Equipped • Seat Belt Pretensioners — If Equipped • Seat Belt Buckle Switch If A Deployment Occurs The front air bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment. NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system. If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any or all of the following may occur: • The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor immediately. 2 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE • As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning. Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air bags will not be in place to protect you. WARNING! Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced as well. NOTE: • Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim, but they will open during air bag deployment. • After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately. Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact, if the communication network remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions: • Cut off fuel to the engine. • Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light button. • Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as the battery has power. • Unlock the power door locks. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 Enhanced Accident Response System Reset Procedure In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System functions after an event, the ignition switch must be changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine. Maintaining Your Air Bag System WARNING! • Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you. Do not modify the components or wiring, including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket side steps or running boards. (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system. • Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service. If your seat, including your trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer. 2 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Event Data Recorder (EDR) This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. • How various systems in your vehicle were operating; Child Restraints • Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened; Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times, including babies and children. Every state in the United States, and every Canadian province, requires that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it. • How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, • How fast the vehicle was traveling. • These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 WARNING! In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child, no matter how strong you are. The child and others could be badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size. There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the labels attached to the child restraint. Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it. NOTE: • For additional information, refer to www.safercar.gov/ parents/index.htm or call: 1–888–327–4236 • Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional information: http:// www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedriverschildsafety-index-53.htm 2 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles Infants and Toddlers Small Children Larger Children Children Too Large for Child Restraints Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Children who are two years old or younger and who have not reached the height or weight limits of their child restraint Children who are at least two years old or who have out-grown the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint Children who have out-grown their forward-facing child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt Children 12 years old or younger, who have out-grown the height or weight limit of their booster seat Infant And Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used rearfacing: infant carriers and convertible child seats. The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until they reach Recommended Type Of Child Restraint Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear seat of the vehicle Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a fivepoint Harness, facing forward in the rear seat of the vehicle Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle the weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 WARNING! WARNING! • Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint. • Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat. Do not install a rear-facing car seat using a rear support leg in this vehicle. The floor of this vehicle is not designed to manage the crash forces of this type of car seat. In a crash, the support leg may not function as it was designed by the car seat manufacturer, and your child may be more severely injured as a result. 2 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Older Children And Child Restraints Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat. All children whose weight or height is above the forwardfacing limit for the child seat should use a belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt. WARNING! • Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. • After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint. • When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 Children Too Large For Booster Seats 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip? Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone: If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly. 1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the vehicle seat? 2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the way back? 3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder between their neck and arm? 4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching the child’s thighs and not their stomach? WARNING! Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly, which may result in serious injury or death. A child must always wear both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly. 2 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints Restraint Type Combined Weight of the Child + Child Restraint Rear-Facing Child Restraint Rear-Facing Child Restraint Forward-Facing Child Restraint Forward-Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below LATCH – Lower Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower Seat Belt + Top Anchors Only Anchors + Top Tether Anchor Tether Anchor X X X X X X THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the following table for more information. LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle LATCH Label Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating positions, the seat belt must be Regular Cab LATCH Positions • Top Tether Anchorage Symbol 2 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Crew Cab 60/40 Split Bench LATCH Positions • • Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position) Top Tether Anchorage Symbol Crew Cab Full Bench LATCH Positions • • Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position) Top Tether Anchorage Symbol Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH What is the weight limit (child’s weight + 65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system until the weight of the child restraint) for using the combined weight of the child and the child LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt restraint? and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg). THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt No Do not use the seat belt when you use the be used together to attach a rear-facing or LATCH anchorage system to attach a rearforward-facing child restraint? facing or forward-facing child restraint. Can a child seat be installed in the center poNo Full bench rear seat only: Use the seat belt sition using the inner LATCH lower anchorand tether anchor to install a child seat in the ages? center seating position. Can two child restraints be attached using a No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two common lower LATCH anchorage? or more child restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position. Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the Yes The child seat may touch the back of the back of the front passenger seat? front passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more information. Can the head restraints be removed? No 2 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Locating The LATCH Anchorages The lower anchorages are round bars that are found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback. They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion. Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages Regular Cab models have tether strap anchorages behind the front center and right seats. Crew Cab models have tether strap anchorages located behind each of the rear seats. Regular Cab Tether Anchorages Crew Cab Rear Outboard Seats Driver Side 1 — Tether Strap Hook 2 — Tether Strap To Child Restraint 3 — Tether Anchor THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some rearfacing child restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage. Center Seat LATCH Full Bench Rear Seat: No Lower Center LATCH Anchorages Available WARNING! • Do not install a child restraint in the center position using the LATCH system. This position is not approved for installing child seats using the LATCH attachments. You must use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center seating position. • Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more than one child restraint. Please refer to “Installing The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System” for typical installation instructions. Split Bench Rear Seat: Center LATCH Anchorages Available If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position, do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard position. WARNING! Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more than one child restraint. Please refer to “Installing The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System” for typical installation instructions. Always follow the directions of the child restraint manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here. 2 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt, following the instructions below. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seating position has. 1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. 2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that seating position. For some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat. 3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating position. 4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor. 5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. 6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction. How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR (ALR) Seat Belt When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by other occupants or being used to secure child restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. • Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle. • Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt. WARNING! • Improper installation or failure to properly secure a child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. (Continued) The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description in “Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint Systems” for additional information on ALR. The cinching latch plate is designed to hold the lap portion of the seat belt tight when webbing is pulled tight and straight through a child restraint’s belt path. Please see the table below and the following sections for more information. 2 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle Crew Cab Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations • Cinch = Cinching Latch Plate Regular Cab Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations • ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor • • ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor • Top Tether Anchorage Symbol Top Tether Anchorage Symbol Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts What is the weight limit (child’s weight + Weight limit of the Always use the tether anchor when using the weight of the child restraint) for using the Child Restraint seat belt to install a forward facing child reTether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a straint, up to the recommended weight limit forward facing child restraint? of the child restraint. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the Yes Contact between the front passenger seat and back of the front passenger seat? the child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. Can the head restraints be removed? No Head restraints may not be removed. Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the Yes In positions with cinching latch plates seat belt against the belt path of the child (CINCH), the buckle stalk may be twisted up restraint? to 3 full turns. Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR retractor. Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR): Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt. WARNING! • Improper installation or failure to properly secure a child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. • Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. 1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position. For some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat. 2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path. 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” 4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat. 2 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode. 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5. 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat. 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor. 9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction. Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching Latch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped: Child restraint systems are designed to be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt. WARNING! • Improper installation or failure to properly secure a child restraint can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. • Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. 1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating position. For some second row seats, you may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its rear-most position to make room for the child seat. You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat. 2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” 4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the vehicle seat. 5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor. 6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction. Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the belt path opening of the child restraint, you may have trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckleend belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out, away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4 to 6, above, to complete the installation of the child restraint. If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn the buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate into the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child restraint installation tight, try a different seating position. 2 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage WARNING! Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat to any location in front of the car seat, including the seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for that seating position, located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of approved tether anchorages in your vehicle. Regular Cab Trucks: In the regular cab truck, the top tether anchorages are located behind the center and right passenger seats. There is a plastic cover over each anchorage. To attach the tether strap of the child restraint: 1. Place the child restraint on the seat and adjust the tether strap so that it will reach over the seat back, under the head restraint and to the tether anchor directly behind the seat. Regular Cab Tether Anchorages 1 — Tether Strap Hook 2 — Tether Strap to Child Restraint 3 — Tether Anchor THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85 2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path between the anchorage and the child seat. The tether strap should go between the head restraint posts underneath the head restraint. You may need to adjust the head restraint to the upward position to pass the tether strap underneath the head restraint and between its posts. 3. Lift the cover (if so equipped), and attach the hook to the square opening in the sheet metal. Tighten the tether strap according to the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. Crew Cab Trucks: The top tether anchorages in this vehicle are tether strap loops located between the rear glass and the back of the rear seat. There is a tether strap loop located behind each seating position. Follow the steps below to attach the tether strap of the child restraint. Right Or Left Outboard Seats: 1. Raise the head restraint and reach between the rear seat and rear glass to access the tether strap loop. WARNING! Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint. Head Restraint In Raised Position 2 86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 3. Pass the tether strap hook under the head restraint behind the child seat, though the tether strap loop behind the seat and over to the center tether strap loop. Tether Strap Loop With Center Head Restraint In Raised Position 2. Place a child restraint on the seat and adjust the tether strap so that it will reach over the seat back, under the head restraint, through the tether strap loop behind the seat and over to the tether strap loop behind the center seat. Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87 4. Attach the hook to the center tether strap loop (see diagram). Tighten the tether strap according to the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop And Attached To Center Tether Strap Loop NOTE: If there are child seats in both of the outboard (left and right) seating positions, the tether strap hooks of both child seats should be connected to the center tether strap loop. This is the correct way to tether two outboard child seats. Center Seat: 1. Raise the head restraint and reach between the rear seat and rear glass to access the tether strap loop. Tether Strap Loop With Head Restraint In Raised Position 2. Place a child restraint on the seat and adjust the tether strap so that it will reach over the seat back, under the head restraint, through the tether strap loop behind the seat and over to the tether strap loop behind either the right or left outboard seat. 2 88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 3. Pass the tether strap hook under the head restraint behind the child seat, though the tether strap loop behind the seat and over to the right or left outboard tether strap loop. Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop And Attached To Outboard Tether Strap Loop Installing Three Child Restraints: Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop 4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap loop (see diagram). Tighten the tether strap according to the child seat manufacturer’s instructions. 1. Place a child restraint on each outboard rear seat. Route the tether straps following the directions for right and left seating positions, above. 2. Attach both hooks to the center tether strap loop, but do not tighten the straps yet. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89 3. Place a child restraint on the center rear seat. Route the tether strap following the directions for the center seating position, above. 4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap loop. 5. Tighten the tether straps according to the child seat manufacturer’s instructions, tightening the right and left tether straps before the center tether strap. WARNING! • An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap. • If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap. Transporting Pets Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts. Left Outboard And Center Seating Position Shown 2 90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break-in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle. Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable. While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided. The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle.” CAUTION! Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result. NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted as a problem. Please check your oil level with the engine oil indicator often during the break in period. Add oil as required. Diesel Engine The Cummins turbocharged diesel engine does not require a break-in period due to its construction. Normal operation is allowed, providing the following recommendations are followed: • Warm up the engine before placing it under load. • Do not operate the engine at idle for prolonged periods. • Use the appropriate transmission gear to prevent engine lugging. • Observe vehicle oil pressure and temperature indicators. • Check the coolant and oil levels frequently. • Vary throttle position at highway speeds when carrying or towing significant weight. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91 NOTE: Light duty operation such as light trailer towing or no load operation will extend the time before the engine is at full efficiency. Reduced fuel economy and power may be seen at this time. For additional vehicle break-in requirements, refer to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting and Operating” of the Owner’s Manual. Because of the construction of the Cummins turbocharged diesel engine, engine run-in is enhanced by loaded operating conditions which allow the engine parts to achieve final finish and fit during the first 6,000 miles (10 000 km). WARNING! (Continued) riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. Exhaust Gas WARNING! • Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. • It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips: • Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area. • If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/ rear doors open, make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode. (Continued) (Continued) SAFETY TIPS Transporting Passengers NOTE: Never transport passengers in the cargo area. WARNING! 2 92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) • If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed. The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system. Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt. Air Bag Warning Light The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” for further information. THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93 Defroster WARNING! (Continued) Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield. See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable. Floor Mat Safety Information Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways. WARNING! An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat fasteners may cause your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH: your floor mat using • ALWAYS securely attach the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT install your floor mat upside down or turn your floor mat over. (Continued) Lightly pull to confirm mat is secured using the floor mat fasteners on a regular basis. • ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MAT before installing any FROM THE VEHICLE other floor mat. NEVER install or stack an additional floor mat on top of an existing floor mat. • ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that cannot be properly attached and secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be replaced, only use a FCA approved floor mat for the specific make, model, and year of your vehicle. • ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the driver’s side floor area. To check for interference, with the vehicle properly parked with the engine off, fully depress the accelerator, the brake, and the clutch pedal (if present) to check for interference. If your floor mat interferes with the operation of any pedal, or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat from the vehicle and place the floor mat in your trunk. (Continued) 2 94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) • ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on the passenger’s side floor area. • ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide into the driver’s side floor area when the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle control. • NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the position of the floor mat and may cause interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals. • If the vehicle carpet has been removed and reinstalled, always properly attach carpet to the floor and check the floor mat fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet. Fully depress each pedal to check for interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats. • It is recommended to only use mild soap and water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check your floor mat has been properly installed and is secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat. Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. Check the wheel bolts for tightness. Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure. Lights Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel. Door Latches Check for proper closing, latching, and locking. Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel, engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause should be located and corrected immediately. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS 䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 ▫ Passenger’s Power Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . .111 ▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . . . .99 ▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 ▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . . .99 ▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 ▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear View Camera Display — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .104 ▫ Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 ▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 ▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .106 ▫ Power Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 ▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 ▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirror — If Equipped . . . . . .108 ▫ “Slide-On-Rod” Features Of Sun Visor — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 ▫ Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . .109 䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 ▫ Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .110 ▫ Manual Seat Adjuster — If Equipped . . . . . . . .115 ▫ 40-20-40 Front Bench Seat — If Equipped . . . . .116 ▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 䡵 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .119 ▫ Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . . .120 ▫ Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Key Fob To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120 ▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121 ▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . . .123 3 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124 ▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 ▫ Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 ▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 ▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . . .125 ▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 ▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . . .133 ▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126 ▫ Headlight Delay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126 ▫ Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126 ▫ Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 ▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 ▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 ▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 ▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 ▫ Parking Lights And Panel Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .128 ▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .135 ▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 䡵 TILT STEERING COLUMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 ▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 䡵 DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 ▫ Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 ▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 ▫ Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 ▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 ▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 䡵 HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED . .138 䡵 SPEED CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 ▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 ▫ To Set A Desired Speed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 ▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 ▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 ▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141 ▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 䡵 PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 ▫ ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 ▫ ParkSense Warning Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 ▫ ParkSense Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 ▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense . . . . . . . . . .147 ▫ Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System. .147 ▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System. . . . . . . . . . . . .148 ▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . .148 䡵 PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 ▫ Enabling And Disabling Front And/Or Rear ParkSense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153 ▫ Service The ParkSense Park Assist System . . . . .154 ▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System. . . . . . . . . . . . .155 ▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . .155 䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156 䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .159 ▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160 䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . . .161 ▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink . . . .162 ▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162 ▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . .164 ▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . . .165 ▫ Using HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 ▫ ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 ▫ Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 ▫ ParkSense Warning Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151 ▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166 ▫ ParkSense Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 3 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . . .168 ▫ Center Storage Compartment — If Equipped . . .178 䡵 AUXILIARY SWITCHES — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .172 ▫ Seatback Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180 䡵 CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173 ▫ Storage (Regular Cab). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181 䡵 POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .173 ▫ Storage and Seats (Crew Cab/Quad Cab) . . . . . .181 䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174 ▫ Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers (Regular Cab Models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182 ▫ Front Seat Cupholders (40–20–40 Seats) . . . . . . .174 䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182 ▫ Front Instrument Panel Cupholders — Floor Storage Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174 ▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182 ▫ Rear Cupholders — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .175 䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176 ▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176 ▫ Door Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177 ▫ Power Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped . . .183 ▫ Manual Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped . .183 䡵 FOLD FLAT LOAD FLOOR — IF EQUIPPED . . . .183 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 MIRRORS Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window. Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward the windshield). This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you. NOTE: The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled when the vehicle is in reverse gear to improve rear view viewing. The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature can be turned On or Off through the touchscreen. • Press the Mirror Dimmer button once to turn the feature On. Adjusting Rearview Mirror 3 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • Press the Mirror Dimmer button a second time to turn the feature Off. NOTE: • Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber. • The 9–1–1 and ASSIST buttons will only function if you are connected to an operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network. Other Uconnect services will only be operable if your Uconnect Access service is active and you are connected to an operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network. ASSIST Call The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you to any one of the following support centers: Automatic Dimming Mirror If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and a 9-1-1 button. WARNING! ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1 and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network connection. • Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and you’ll be connected to someone who can help. Roadside Assistance will know what vehicle you’re driving and its location. Additional fees may apply for roadside Assistance. • Uconnect Access Customer Care – In-vehicle support for Uconnect Access. • Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other vehicle issues. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 9-1-1 Call 1. Push the 9-1-1 Call button on the rearview mirror. NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error, there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call system initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the 9-1-1 Call connection, push the 9-1-1 Call button on the rearview mirror or press the cancellation button on the device screen. Termination of the 9-1-1 Call will turn off the green LED light on the rearview mirror. 2. The LED light located between the ASSIST and 9-1-1 buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a connection to a 9-1-1 operator has been made. 3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9-1-1 operator is made, the 9-1-1 Call system may transmit the following important vehicle information to a 9-1-1 operator: • Indication that the occupant placed a 9-1-1 Call. • The vehicle brand. • The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle. 4. You should be able to speak with the 9-1-1 operator through the vehicle audio system to determine if additional help is needed. WARNING! ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1 and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network connection. NOTE: • Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber. • Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1 operator may be able to open a voice connection with the vehicle to determine if additional help is needed. Once the 9-1-1 operator opens a voice connection with the vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system, the operator should be able to speak with you or other vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system will attempt to remain connected with the 9-1-1 operator until the 9-1-1 operator terminates the connection. 5. The 9-1-1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate emergency responders and provide them with important vehicle information and GPS coordinates. 3 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! WARNING! (Continued) • If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions or location), do not wait for voice contact from a 9-1-1 operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle immediately and move to a safe location. • Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and GPS antennas. You could prevent operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency call. An operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and GPS signal reception is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function properly. • The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail, never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE. • Modifications to any part of the 9-1-1 Call system could cause the air bag system to fail when you need it. You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to help protect you. (Continued) 9-1-1 Call System Limitations Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1 Call system capabilities. 9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and Mexico may not answer or respond to 9-1-1 system calls. If the 9-1-1 Call system detects a malfunction, any of the following may occur at the time the malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle: • The rearview mirror light located between the ASSIST and 9-1-1 buttons will continuously be illuminated red. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 • The device screen will display the following message “Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your dealer.” • An in-vehicle audio message will state “Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your dealer.” WARNING! • Ignoring the rearview mirror light could mean you will not have 9-1-1 Call services. If the rearview mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer service the 9-1-1 Call system immediately. • The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on the Air Bag Warning Light on the instrument panel if a malfunction in any part of the system is detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer service the Occupant Restraint Control system immediately. Even if the 9-1-1 Call system is fully functional, factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the 9-1-1 Call system operation. These include, but are not limited to, the following factors: • Delayed accessories mode is active. • The ignition is in the OFF position. • The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact. • The 9-1-1 Call system software and/or hardware are damaged during a crash. • The vehicle battery loses power or becomes disconnected during a vehicle crash. • 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and/or Global Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or obstructed. • Equipment malfunction at the 9-1-1 operator facility. • Operator error by the 9-1-1 operator. • 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network congestion. • Weather. • Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels. WARNING! ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1 and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network connection. 3 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE: • Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber. • Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s 1X(voice/ data) or 3G(data) and GPS antennas. You could prevent 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) and GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency call. An operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network connection and a GPS signal is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function properly. General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. CAUTION! To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean. Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear View Camera Display — If Equipped A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to center on the view through the rear window. This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 When the vehicle is placed into reverse gear a video display illuminates to display the image generated by the rear view camera. The auto dimming feature is also disabled to improve rear view viewing. Outside Mirrors To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror. NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with illuminated approach lights under the outside mirrors, they can be turned off through the instrument cluster display or the Uconnect radio. For further information, refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” and “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”. WARNING! Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear View Camera Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are. Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror. Some vehicles will not have a convex passenger side mirror. 3 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Outside Mirrors Folding Feature Power Mirrors — If Equipped All outside mirrors are designed to be able to be manually folded both forward and rearward to prevent damage. The controls for the power mirrors are located on the driver’s door trim panel. Folding Mirror Power Mirror Controls Location CAUTION! It is recommended to fold the mirrors into the full rearward position to resist damage when entering a car wash or a narrow location. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons and a four-way mirror control switch. Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to move. 3 Power Mirror Controls 1 — Mirror Select Buttons 2 — Four-Way Mirror Control Switch To adjust a mirror, push either the L (left) or R (right) button to select the mirror that you want to adjust. Power Mirror Movement Heated Mirrors — If Equipped These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature will be activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information. 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Illuminated Vanity Mirror — If Equipped Illuminated vanity mirrors are located on each sun visor. To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover upward. The lights will turn on automatically. Closing the mirror cover turns off the light. “Slide-On-Rod” Features Of Sun Visor — If Equipped The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for additional flexibility in positioning the visor to block out the sun. To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature, rotate the sun visor downward and unclip it. Pull the sun visor along the “Slide-On-Rod” until the sun visor is in the desired position. Illuminated Vanity Mirror “Slide-On-Rod” Extender UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped These mirrors are designed with an adjustable mirror head to provide a greater vision range when towing extra-wide loads. To change position inboard or outboard, the mirror head should be rotated (flipped in or out). NOTE: Fold the trailer towing mirrors rearward prior to entering an automated car wash. A small blindspot mirror is located next to main mirror and can be adjusted separately. Blindspot Mirror Trailer Towing Position 3 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE SEATS Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle. WARNING! • It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. • Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly. Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped Some models may be equipped with an eight-way power driver’s seat. The power seat switches are located on the outboard side of the driver’s seat cushion. There are two power seat switches that are used to control the movement of the seat cushion and the seatback. Power Seat Switches 1 — Power Seat Switch 2 — Power Seatback Switch Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch. The seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position is reached. Reclining The Seatback The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position is reached. WARNING! • Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death. • Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt. • Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision, you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death. CAUTION! Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path. Tilting The Seat Up Or Down The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position is reached. Passenger’s Power Seat — If Equipped Some models are equipped with a six-way power passenger seat. The power seat switch is located on the outboard side of the seat. The switch is used to control the movement of the seat and seat cushion. Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. Push the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position has been reached. 3 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down Power Lumbar — If Equipped The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch. The seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the desired position is reached. Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats may be also be equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat. Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar support. Push the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar support. Tilting The Seat Up Or Down The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch when you have reached the desired position. Lumbar Control Switch UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 Heated Seats — If Equipped On some models, the front and rear seats may be equipped with heaters located in the seat cushions and seat backs. WARNING! • Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods of time. • Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat. Front Heated Seats The front heated seats control buttons are located within the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen. • Press the heated seat button setting On. once to turn the HI • Press the heated seat button the LO setting On. a second time to turn • Press the heated seat button heating elements OFF. a third time to turn the If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the display will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes. NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate. Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated seats can be programed to come on during a remote start. If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, this feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Rear Heated Seats On some models, the two outboard seats are equipped with heated seats. The heated seat switches for these seats are located on the rear of the center console. 3 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE There are two heated seat switches that allow the rear passengers to operate the seats independently. You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO and none for OFF. Push the switch once to select HI-level heating. Push the switch a second time to select LO-level heating. Push the switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF. NOTE: • Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within two to five minutes. • The engine must be running for the heated seats to operate. When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one, indicating the change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes. Ventilated Seats — If Equipped Located in the seat cushion are small fans that draw the air from the passenger compartment and pull air through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds, HI and LO. The front ventilated seats control buttons are located within the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen. • Press the ventilated seat button once to choose HI. • Press the ventilated seat button choose LO. • Press the ventilated seat button the ventilated seat OFF. a second time to a third time to turn NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated seats to operate. Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start, the ventilated seats can be programed to come on during a remote start. If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, this feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 Manual Seat Adjuster — If Equipped Both front seats are adjustable forward or rearward. The manual seat adjustment handle is located under the seat cushion at the front edge of each seat. While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched. WARNING! • Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death. • Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted seat belt. Manual Seat Adjuster 3 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Reclining Rear Seats — If Equipped 40-20-40 Front Bench Seat — If Equipped The recliner handle is located on the outside of the seat cushion. To adjust the seatback, lift upward on the handle, lean back on the seatback and when you reach the desired position, release the handle. The seat is divided into three segments. The outboard seat portions are each 40% of the total width of the seat. On some models, the back of the center portion (20%) easily folds down to provide an armrest/center storage compartment. Head Restraints Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in the event of a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear. WARNING! Rear Seat Recliner Handle WARNING! Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest. In a collision, you could slide under the seat belt, which could result in serious injury or death. • All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash. • Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 Front Head Restraints To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button located on the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint. 3 To remove the head restraint, raise it up as far as it can go. Then, push the adjustment button and the release button at the base of each post while pulling the head restraint up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes. Then, adjust it to the appropriate height. Adjustment Buttons 1 — Release Button 2 — Adjustment Button WARNING! • A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed head restraints in a location outside the occupant compartment. (Continued) 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! (Continued) • ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the re-installation instructions above prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. NOTE: Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees to the incorrect position in an attempt to gain additional clearance to the back of the head. WARNING! A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow removed head restraints in a location outside the occupant compartment. Rear Head Restraints The rear seats are equipped with adjustable and removable head restraints. To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button located on the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint. To remove the head restraint, push the adjustment button and the release button while pulling upward on the whole assembly. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts into the holes and adjust it to the appropriate height. NOTE: To remove outboard restraints, the rear seat bottom must be folded up. Release/Adjustment Buttons 1 — Release Button 2 — Adjustment Button UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 NOTE: • The rear center head restraint (Crew Cab and Quad Cab) has only one adjustment position that is used to aid in the routing of a tether. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. • Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees to the incorrect position in an attempt to gain additional clearance to the back of the head. remote keyless entry key fob can also be programmed to recall the same positions when the unlock button is pushed. NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, one key fob can be linked to memory position 1 and the other key fob can be linked to memory position 2. The memory seat buttons are located on the outboard side of the driver’s seat cushion. WARNING! ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the re-installation instructions above prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED This feature allows the driver to store up to two different memory profiles for easy recall through a memory switch. Each memory profile contains desired position settings for the driver’s seat, side mirrors, adjustable pedals (if equipped) and a set of desired radio station presets. Your Memory Seat Buttons 3 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Programming The Memory Feature To create a new memory profile, perform the following: Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Key Fob To Memory 1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine). Your key fobs can be programmed to recall one of two pre-programmed memory profiles by pushing the unlock button on the key fob. 2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences (seat, side mirrors, adjustable pedals and radio station presets). NOTE: Before programming your key fobs to memory the feature has to be selected. 3. Push and release the S (Set) button on the memory switch. 4. Within five seconds, push and release either of the memory buttons (1) or (2). The instrument cluster display will show which memory position has been set. NOTE: • Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a memory profile. • To set a memory profile to your key fob, refer to “Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry Key Fob To Memory” in this section. • If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, you must select the “Memory To Fob” feature through the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. • If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, you must select the “Key Fob Linked To Memory” feature through the instrument cluster display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. To program your key fobs, perform the following: 1. Cycle the vehicle’s ignition to the OFF position. 2. Select desired memory profile (1) or (2). UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set, refer to ⬙Programming The Memory Feature⬙ for instructions on how to set a memory profile. 3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and release the SET (S) button on the memory switch, then push and release button (1) or (2) accordingly. “Memory Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the instrument cluster display. 4. Push and release the lock button on the key fob within 10 seconds. NOTE: Your key fobs can be unlinked to your memory settings by pushing the SET (S) button, and within 10 seconds, followed by pushing the unlock button on the key fob. Memory Position Recall NOTE: • For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, the vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in PARK, a message will appear in the instrument cluster display. • For vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, the vehicle speed must be at 0 mph (0 km/h) to recall memory positions. If a recall is attempted with the vehicle speed above 0 mph (0 km/h), a message will appear in the instrument cluster display. Driver One Memory Position Recall • To recall the memory settings for driver one using the memory switch, push memory button number 1 on the memory switch. • To recall the memory settings for driver one using the key fob, push the unlock button on the key fob linked to memory position 1. Driver Two Memory Position Recall • To recall the memory setting for driver two using the memory switch, push memory button number 2 on the memory switch. • To recall the memory settings for driver two using the key fob, push the unlock button on the key fob linked to memory position 2. A recall can be cancelled by pushing any of the memory buttons during a recall (S, 1, or 2). When a recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat and the power pedals (if equipped) stop moving. A delay of one second will occur before another recall can be selected. 3 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Easy Entry/Exit Seat This feature provides automatic driver’s seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle. The distance the driver’s seat moves depends on where you have the driver’s seat positioned when you remove the key fob from the ignition (or change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go). • When you remove the key fob from the ignition (or change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go), the driver’s seat will move about 2.4 inches (60 mm) rearward if the driver’s seat position is greater than or equal to 2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set position when you place the ignition into the ACC or RUN position. • When you remove the key fob from the ignition (or change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go), the driver’s seat will move to a position 0.3 inches (7.7 mm) forward of the rear stop if the driver’s seat position is between 0.9 inches and 2.7 inches (22.7 mm and 67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set position when you place the ignition to the ACC or RUN position. • The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the driver’s seat position is less than 0.9 inches (22.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry. Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy Entry and Easy Exit position. NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy Entry/ Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through the programmable features in the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD To open the hood, two latches must be released. 1. Pull the hood release lever located below the steering wheel at the base of the instrument panel. 3 Safety Latch Location (1500 Series Shown) WARNING! Hood Release 2. Reach into the opening beneath the center of the hood and push the safety latch lever to the left to release it, before raising the hood. Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death. 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to close it. Use a firm downward push at the front center of the hood to ensure that both latches engage. LIGHTS The headlight switch is located on the left side of the instrument panel, next to the steering wheel. The headlight switch controls the operation of the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, cargo lights and fog lights (if equipped). Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and fog light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass lights. Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed. To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing. NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with illuminated approach lights under the outside mirrors they can be turned off through the instrument cluster display or the Uconnect radio. For further information refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” and “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”. CAUTION! Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the lenses. (Continued) Headlight Switch Location UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 Headlights To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the headlight position. When the headlight switch is on, the parking lights, taillights, license plate light and instrument panel lights are also turned on. To turn off the headlights, rotate the headlight switch back to the O (Off) position. Automatic Headlights — If Equipped This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on, rotate the headlight switch to the AUTO position. When the system is on, the Headlight Delay feature is also on. This means the headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. To turn the automatic headlights off, turn the headlight switch out of the AUTO position. NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights will turn on in the Automatic Mode. Headlights On With Wipers (Available With Automatic Headlights Only) When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off, if they were turned on by this feature. NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, this feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this feature can be programmed through the instrument cluster display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Automatic Headlight Position 3 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the engine is started and the transmission is in any gear except PARK. This provides a constant ⬙lights on⬙ condition until the ignition is turned OFF. The lights illuminate at less than half of normal intensity. If the parking brake is applied, the Daytime Running Lights (DRL) will turn off. Also, if a turn signal is activated, the DRL lamp on the same side of the vehicle may turn off for the duration of the turn signal activation. Once the turn signal is no longer active, the DRL lamp will illuminate. Headlight Delay To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for approximately up to 90 seconds. This delay is initiated when the ignition is turned off while the headlight switch is on, and then the headlight switch is cycled off. Headlight delay can be cancelled by either turning the headlight switch on then off, or by turning the ignition to the ON/RUN position. NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, this feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this feature can be programmed through the instrument cluster display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” for further information. Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If Equipped The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view. NOTE: • If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. • If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, the Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be turned on or off using the instrument cluster display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 • Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other obstructions on the windshield or camera lens will cause the system to function improperly. If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, the Automatic High Beams are enabled through the instrument cluster display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. • To opt out of the Advanced Auto High-Beam Sensitivity Control (default) and enter Reduced High-Beam Sensitivity Control (not recommended), toggle the high beam lever six full on/off cycles within 10 seconds of ignition ON. System will return to default setting upon ignition off. 2. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight position. If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed to ensure proper performance. See your local authorized dealer. To Activate 1. If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the Automatic High Beams are enabled through the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. 3. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode. NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is at or above 20 mph (32 km/h). To Deactivate 1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward in vehicle) to manually deactivate the system (normal operation of low beams). 2. Push back on the multifunction lever to reactivate the system. 3 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Parking Lights And Panel Lights To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise. To turn off the parking lights, rotate the headlight switch back to the O (off) position. Fog Lights — If Equipped The fog lights are turned on by rotating the headlight switch to the parking light or headlight position and pushing in the headlight rotary control. indicator light located in the instrument cluster display will illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights will turn off when the switch is pushed a second time, when the headlight switch is rotated to the off position, or the high beam is selected. Lights-On Reminder If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left on after the ignition is turned off, a chime will sound when the driver’s door is opened. Battery Saver To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, load shedding is provided for both the interior and exterior lights. If the ignition is off and any door is left ajar for 10 minutes or the dimmer control is rotated all the way up to the dome on position for 10 minutes, the interior lights will automatically turn off. NOTE: Battery saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is on. Fog Light Switch The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights are on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam. An If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled off, the exterior lights will automatically turn off after eight minutes. If the headlights are turned on and left on for eight minutes while the ignition is off, the exterior lights will automatically turn off. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 Interior Lights Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front doors are opened, when the dimmer control (rotating wheel on the bottom of the switch) is rotated to the far right detent position. If your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless Entry and the unlock button is pushed on the key fob the courtesy and dome lights will turn on. When a door is open and the interior lights are on, rotating the dimmer control all the way left, to the off detent, will cause all the interior lights to go out. This is also known as the ⬙Party⬙ mode because it allows the doors to stay open for extended periods of time without discharging the vehicle’s battery. The brightness of the instrument panel as well as the ambient lighting can be regulated by rotating the dimmer control right (brighter) or left (dimmer). When the headlights are on you can supplement the brightness of the odometer, trip odometer, radio and overhead console by rotating the control to the right until you hear a click. This feature is termed the “Parade” mode and is useful when headlights are required during the day. NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the dimming of the touchscreen is programmable through the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings ” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further details. 3 Dimmer Control 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Courtesy/Reading Lights Both lights in the overhead console and rear passenger compartment will illuminate as courtesy lights when a door is opened, when the dimmer control is rotated to the courtesy light position (full right position), or when the unlock button is pushed on the Remote Keyless Entry key fob, if equipped. These lights are also operated individually as reading lights by pushing on the corresponding lens. Rear Passenger Courtesy/Reading Light NOTE: The courtesy/reading lights will remain on until the switch is pushed a second time, so be sure they have been turned off before leaving the vehicle. If the interior lights are left on after the ignition is turned off, they will automatically turn off after 15 minutes. Front Courtesy/Reading Lights UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 Ambient Light Cargo Light The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibility of the floor console area. The cargo light is turned on by pushing on the cargo light button. Ambient Light The cargo light will also turn on for approximately 60 seconds when a key fob UNLOCK button is pushed, as part of the Illuminated Entry feature. 3 Cargo Light Button 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the steering column. Turn Signals Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster display will flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights. NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective. Lane Change Assist Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash three times. Then, the turn signal (right or left) will automatically turn off. Flash-To-Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steering wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on until the lever is released. Turn Signal Lever UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 High/Low Beam Switch WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument panel to switch the headlights to high beam. Pulling the multifunction lever back toward the steering wheel will turn the low beams back on, or shut the high beams off. Windshield Wipers High/Low Beam Switch The wipers and washers are operated by a switch in the multifunction lever. Turn the end of the handle to select the desired wiper speed. Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch Windshield Wiper Operation Rotate the end of the lever upward, to the first detent past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation. Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper operation. 3 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Intermittent Wiper System The intermittent feature of this system was designed for use when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. For maximum delay between cycles, rotate the control knob into the upper end of the delay range. The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob until it enters the low continual speed position. The delay can be regulated from a maximum of about 18 seconds between cycles, to a cycle every one second. The delay intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less. Windshield Washers To use the windshield washer, push the washer knob, located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to the second detent. Washer fluid will be sprayed and the wiper will operate for two to three cycles after the washer knob is released from this position. If the washer knob is depressed while in the delay range, the wiper will operate for several seconds after the washer knob is released. It will then resume the intermittent interval previously selected. If the washer knob is pushed while in the off position, the wiper will turn on and cycle approximately three times after the wash knob is released. To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers. WARNING! Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision. You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather, warm the windshield with the defroster before and during windshield washer use. Mist Feature When a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle is needed, push the washer knob, located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to the first detent and release. The wipers will cycle one time and automatically shut off. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield. The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid. Positions 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less wiper sensitivity. Positions 4 and 5 can be used if the driver desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the O (off) position when not using the system. Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped NOTE: This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to one of five settings to activate this feature. • The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position. NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, this feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this feature can be programmed through the instrument cluster display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least sensitive, and wiper delay position 5 is the most sensitive. Position 3 should be used for normal rain conditions. • The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly when ice, or dried salt water is present on the windshield. • Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone may reduce Rain Sensing performance. The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the following conditions: • Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C). 3 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the ignition is ON, and the transmission is in the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will not operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), or the gear selector is moved out of the NEUTRAL position. • Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed the ignition switch in the RUN position, rain sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has been selected, and no other inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist. TILT STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. The tilt lever is located on the steering column, below the multifunction lever. Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to unlock the steering column. With one hand firmly on the steering wheel, move the steering column up or down, as desired. Release the lever to lock the steering column firmly in place. Tilt Steering Lever WARNING! Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and seat position. This feature allows the brake, accelerator, and clutch pedals (if equipped) to move toward or away from the driver to provide improved position with the steering wheel. The adjustable pedal switch is located to the left side of the steering column. following messages will appear on vehicles equipped with an instrument cluster display if the pedals are attempted to be adjusted when the system is locked out (“Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged” or “Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”). NOTE: • Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows full pedal travel. • Further small adjustments may be necessary to find the best possible seat/pedal position. • For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat, you can use your remote keyless entry key fob or the memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel to return the adjustable pedals to pre-programmed positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information. WARNING! Adjustable Pedals Switch • The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF. • The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the Speed Control System is on. The Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving. You could lose control and have an accident. Always adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked. 3 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the adjustable pedal’s path. HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated steering wheel has been turned on, it will operate for an average of 80 minutes before automatically shutting off. This time may vary based on the temperature of the surrounding environment or the heated steering wheel may not turn on when it is already warm. The heated steering wheel control button is located on the center of the instrument panel below the climate controls. If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the heated steering wheel control button is located within the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen. • Press the heated steering wheel button the heating element On. once to turn • Press the heated steering wheel button to turn the heating element Off. a second time NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated steering wheel to operate. Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a remote start. If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, this feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this feature can be programmed through the instrument cluster display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 WARNING! • Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods. • Do not place anything on the steering wheel that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering wheel covers of any type and material. This may cause the steering wheel heater to overheat. SPEED CONTROL When engaged, the Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h). The Speed Control buttons are located on the right side of the steering wheel. 3 Speed Control Switches 1 — ON/OFF 2 — RES + 3 — SET 4 — CANCEL NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple speed control functions are operated at the same time. If this occurs, the Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed. 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE To Activate Push the ON/OFF button. The cruise control indicator light in the instrument cluster display will illuminate. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The cruise control indicator light will turn off. The system should be turned off when not in use. WARNING! Leaving the Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You could lose control and have an accident. Always leave the system off when you are not using it. To Set A Desired Speed Turn the Speed Control on. When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, push the SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed. NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pushing the SET (-) button. To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL button or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Speed Control without erasing the set speed from memory. Pushing the on/off button or turning the ignition to the OFF position erases the set speed from memory. To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) button and release. Resume can be used at any speed above 25 mph (40 km/h). UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 To Vary The Speed Setting To Increase Speed When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the RES (+) button. The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for more information. The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h): U.S. Speed (mph) • Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph. • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established. Metric Speed (km/h) • Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 km/h. • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established. To Decrease Speed When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button. The driver’s preferred units can be selected through the instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for more information. The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h): U.S. Speed (mph) • Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph. • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established. 3 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Metric Speed (km/h) • Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 km/h. • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released, then the new set speed will be established. To Accelerate For Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed. Using Speed Control On Hills The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed. NOTE: The Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal. On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Speed Control. WARNING! Speed Control can be dangerous where the system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and have an accident. Do not use Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery. PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during a parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense System Usage Precautions” in this section for limitations of this system and recommendations. ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this gear selector position, the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. When in REVERSE and above the system’s operating speed, a warning will appear within the instrument cluster display indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h). ParkSense Warning Display ParkSense Sensors NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, this feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. For the 3500, 4500 and 5500 Chassis Cab vehicles, the rear ParkSense sensors are shipped loose. Please Refer to the Ram Body Builders Guide for more information. The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/ bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 18 in (45 cm) up to 79 in (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle. The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instrument cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if “Sound and Display” is selected. If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this feature can be programmed through the instrument cluster display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” for further information. ParkSense Display When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display will turn on indicating the system status. The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a single arc in the left and/or right rear regions based on the object’s distance and location relative to the vehicle. 3 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE If an object is detected in the left and/or right rear region, the display will show a single solid arc in the left and/or right rear region and the system will produce a tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the object, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to continuous. Slow Tone Single 1/2 Second Tone UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 3 Fast Tone Continuous Tone 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle: Rear Distance (inches/cm) Audible Alert Chime Arc Radio Volume Reduced Greater than 79 inches (200 cm) None WARNING ALERTS 79-45 inches 45-31 inches (200-115 cm) (115-80 cm) None Single 1/2 Second Tone 4th Solid No Yes NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone. Adjustable Chime Volume Settings The rear chime volume settings are programmable. • If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the settings may be programmed through the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings ” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. 31-18 inches (80-45 cm) Less than 18 inches (45 cm) Slow Fast Continuous 3rd Solid Yes 2nd Flashing Yes 1st Flashing Yes • If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, the settings may be programmed through the instrument cluster display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 Enabling And Disabling ParkSense Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the ParkSense switch. During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster display will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will show the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙ or the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster display will show the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙ or the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense will not operate. When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the system, the instrument cluster will display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five seconds. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the instrument cluster display will show the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. NOTE: The ParkSense system will automatically disable when the system detects that a trailer with trailer brakes has been connected to the Integrated Trailer Brake Module. The instrument cluster display will show “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in reverse. The ParkSense switch LED will be ON when ParkSense is disabled or defective. The ParkSense switch LED will be OFF when the system is enabled. If ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙ appears in the instrument cluster display make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction, and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues to appear, see an authorized dealer. If the ParkSense switch is pushed, and the system is disabled or requires service, the ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will be ON. If ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ appears in the instrument cluster display, see your authorized dealer. 3 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Cleaning The ParkSense System Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors. ParkSense System Usage Precautions NOTE: • Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating properly. • Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense. • When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster display will show ⬙PARKSENSE OFF⬙. Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key. • When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument cluster display will show the ⬙PARKSENSE OFF⬙ message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. • ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio when it is sounding a tone. • Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/ bumper. • Ensure the ParkSense system is OFF if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc., are placed within 18 inches (45 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close obstacle as a sensor problem, causing the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message to appear in the instrument cluster display. • On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered or open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE. A lowered tailgate could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 WARNING! CAUTION! • Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. • Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle. • ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity. • The vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using ParkSense. 3 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the distance between the rear and/or front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up or moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense System Usage Precautions” in this section for limitations of this system and recommendations. ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN position. ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at one of these gear selector positions, the system will remain active until the vehicle speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. A warning will appear in the instrument cluster display indicating the vehicle is above ParkSense operating speed. The system will become active again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h). ParkSense Sensors For the 3500, 4500 and 5500 Chassis Cab vehicles, the rear ParkSense sensors are shipped loose. Please Refer to the Ram Body Builders Guide for more information. The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/ bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 18 inches (45 cm) up to 79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle. The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front fascia/ bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 47 inches (120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 ParkSense Warning Display ParkSense Display The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the instrument cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. The warning display will turn on indicating the system status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected. The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if Sound and Display is selected. If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear region, the display will show a single arc in the left and/or right rear region and the system will produce a tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the tone will change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to continuous. NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, this feature can be programmed through the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this feature can be programmed through the instrument cluster display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing a single arc in the left and/or right rear regions based on the obstacle’s distance and location relative to the vehicle. 3 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle: Rear Distance (inches/cm) Greater than 79 inches (200 cm) WARNING ALERTS 79-45 inches 45-31 inches (200-115 cm) (115-80 cm) 31-18 inches (80-45 cm) Front Distance (inches/cm) Greater than 47 inches (120 cm) 47-39 inches (120-100 cm) 39-25 inches (100-65 cm) 25-12 inches (65-30 cm) Audible Alert (Chime) None Slow (for rear only) Fast Arcs Radio Volume Reduced None No Single 1/2 Second Tone (for rear only) 4th Solid Yes Less than 18 inches (45 cm) Less than 12 inches (30 cm) Continuous 3rd Solid Yes 2nd Flashing Yes 1st Flashing Yes NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 Front Park Assist Audible Alerts ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert (chime) after approximately three seconds when an obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and brake pedal is applied. Adjustable Chime Volume Settings The Front and Rear chime volume settings are programmable. • If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the settings may be programmed through the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings ” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. • If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, the settings may be programmed through the instrument cluster display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Enabling And Disabling Front And/Or Rear ParkSense Front ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the Front ParkSense switch. Rear ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the Rear ParkSense switch. When the Front or Rear ParkSense switch is pushed to disable the system, the instrument cluster display will show the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five seconds. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the Front or Rear system is disabled, the instrument cluster display will show the ⬙FRONT PARKSENSE OFF⬙ or ⬙REAR PARKSENSE OFF⬙ message for five seconds, followed by a vehicle graphic with ⬙OFF⬙ in the corresponding side. This vehicle graphic will be displayed for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. NOTE: Arc alerts from the enabled ParkSense system, will interrupt the five second messages, and the instrument cluster display will show the vehicle graphic with the corresponding arcs and ⬙OFF⬙ message. 3 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will be ON when Front or Rear ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will be OFF when the Front or Rear system is enabled. If the Front or Rear ParkSense switch is pushed, and the system requires service, the Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will be ON. Service The ParkSense Park Assist System During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense System has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster display will actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙, or the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message for five seconds. When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster display will display a ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙ or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ pop up message for five seconds. After five seconds, a vehicle graphic will be displayed with ⬙UNAVAILABLE⬙ at either the front or rear sensor location depending on where the fault is detected. The system will continue to provide arc alerts for the side that is functioning properly. These arc alerts will interrupt the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙, ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙, or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ messages if an object is detected within the five second pop-up duration. The vehicle graphic will remain displayed for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. If ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS⬙ or ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS⬙ appears in the instrument cluster display make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/ bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the message continues to appear see an authorized dealer. If the ⬙PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED⬙ message appears in the instrument cluster display, see an authorized dealer. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 Cleaning The ParkSense System Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors. ParkSense System Usage Precautions NOTE: • Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating properly. • Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of ParkSense. • When you turn Front or Rear ParkSense off, the instrument cluster display will read “FRONT PARKSENSE OFF” or “REAR PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once you turn Front or Rear ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key. • When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE position and Front or Rear ParkSense is turned off, the instrument cluster display will show the ⬙FRONT PARKSENSE OFF⬙ or ⬙REAR PARKSENSE OFF⬙ message for five seconds, followed by a vehicle graphic with ⬙OFF⬙ in the corresponding side. This vehicle graphic will be displayed for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. • ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio when it is sounding a tone. • Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can result in the system not working properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind or in front of the fascia/bumper. • Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system off if obstacles such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are placed within 18 in (45 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a close obstacle as a sensor problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be appear in the instrument cluster display. • On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered or open position. A lowered tailgate could provide a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle. 3 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! CAUTION! • Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using ParkSense. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety and must continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. • Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recommended that the ball mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle. • ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close proximity. • The vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using ParkSense. PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see a image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE or whenever it is initiated through ⬙Backup Camera⬙ button in the ⬙Controls⬙ menu. Whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE, the image will be displayed in the rearview mirror display (if equipped) or Uconnect screen (if equipped) along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 NOTE: For the 3500, 4500 and 5500 Chassis Cab vehicles, the Rear Backup Camera is shipped loose and not installed. Please Refer to the Ram Body Builders Guide for more information. NOTE: If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph (13 km/h), the Rear View Camera image will be displayed continuously until deactivated via the touchscreen button ⬙X⬙. The ParkView Camera is located to the left of the tailgate handle. If Equipped — Cargo Camera Icons: • — Backup Camera Touchscreen Button When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with Camera delay turned OFF), the rear Camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again. • — Cargo Camera Touchscreen Button When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with Camera delay turned ON), the rear Camera image will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of ⬙REVERSE⬙ unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into ⬙PARK⬙ or the ignition is switched to the OFF position. Whenever the Rear View Camera image is activated through ⬙Backup Camera⬙ button in the ⬙Controls⬙ menu, a display timer for the image is initiated. The image will continue to be displayed until the display timer exceeds 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is above 8 mph (13 km/h) or the touchscreen button ⬙X⬙ to disable display of the Rear View Camera image is pressed. If equipped with a Cargo Camera, a touchscreen button to indicate the current active Camera image being displayed is made available whenever the Rear View Camera image is displayed. If equipped with a Cargo Camera, a touchscreen button to switch the display to Cargo Camera image is made available whenever the Rear View Camera image is displayed. A touchscreen button ⬙X⬙ to disable display of the camera image is made available when the vehicle is not in REVERSE gear. 3 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path based on the steering wheel position. The active guide lines will show separate zones that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle. NOTE: For further information about how to access and change the programmable features of the ParkView Rear Backup Camera, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. The following table shows the approximate distances for each zone: Zones Red Yellow Green Distance to the rear of the vehicle 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm) 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2m) 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater) WARNING! (Continued) check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. CAUTION! • To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is unable to view every obstacle or object in your drive path. • To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when using ParkView. WARNING! Drivers must be careful when backing up even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to (Continued) NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 Turning Rear View Camera Image On: OVERHEAD CONSOLE — IF EQUIPPED 1. Press the ⬙Controls⬙ button located on the bottom of the Uconnect display. The overhead console is located on the headliner above the rearview mirror. The overhead console contains the following features: 2. Press the ⬙Backup Camera⬙ button View Camera system on. to turn the Rear NOTE: Once initiated by the ⬙Backup Camera⬙ button, the Rear View Camera image may be deactivated by pressing the ⬙X⬙ button on the touchscreen. On deactivation, the previous selected screen will appear. • Courtesy/Reading Lights • Power Sliding Rear Window Switch — If Equipped Overhead Console 3 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Courtesy/Reading Lights Both lights in the overhead console and rear passenger compartment will illuminate as courtesy lights when a door is opened, when the dimmer control is rotated to the courtesy light position (full right position), or when the unlock button is pushed on the Remote Keyless Entry key fob, if equipped. These lights are also operated individually as reading lights by pushing on the corresponding lens. Rear Passenger Courtesy/Reading Light NOTE: The courtesy/reading lights will remain on until the switch is pushed a second time, so be sure they have been turned off before leaving the vehicle. If the interior lights are left on after the ignition is turned off, they will automatically turn off after 15 minutes. Front Courtesy/Reading Lights UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery. The HomeLink buttons that are located in the overhead console designate the three different HomeLink channels. HomeLink Buttons NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active. WARNING! • Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the universal transceiver. Do not train the transceiver if people, pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal safety standards. This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance. • Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death. NOTE: Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by federal safety standards. This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance. 3 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Before You Begin Programming HomeLink Programming A Rolling Code Ensure your vehicle is parked outside of the garage before you begin programming. For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995. These garage door openers can be identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and close the door. The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer. For efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink system. To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds. The instrument cluster display will display “CLEARING CHANNELS.” Release the buttons when “CHANNELS CLEARED” appears on the display. NOTE: • For vehicle’s equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, place the ignition in the RUN position with the Engine ON. • Erasing all channels should only be performed when programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons. • If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for information or assistance. Training The Garage Door Opener 1 — Door Opener 2 — Training Button UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. For vehicle’s equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, place the ignition in the RUN position with the Engine ON. 2. Place the hand - held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to program. 3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to program while you push and hold the hand - held transmitter button. 4. Continue to hold both buttons until the instrument cluster display changes from “CHANNEL # TRAINING” to “CHANNEL # TRAINED,” then release both buttons. NOTE: • It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cases for the channel to train. • If “DID NOT TRAIN” appears in the Instrument Cluster Display, repeat from Step 2. 5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener/device motor. Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some garage door openers/devices there may be a light that blinks when the garage door opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode. NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pushed. 6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two seconds each time). The instrument cluster display will show “CHANNEL # TRANSMIT.” If the garage door opener/device activates, programming is complete. NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not activate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to complete the training. To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels. 3 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button (Rolling Code) To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps: 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. 2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the button. 3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining steps. Programming A Non-Rolling Code For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured before 1995. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. 2. Place the hand - held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to program. 3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to program while you push and hold the hand - held transmitter button. 4. Continue to hold both buttons until the instrument cluster display changes from “CHANNEL # TRAINING” to “CHANNEL # TRAINED,” then release both buttons. NOTE: • It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cases for the channel to train. • If the instrument cluster display shows “DID NOT TRAIN”, repeat from Step 2. 5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button. The instrument cluster display will display “CHANNEL # TRANSMIT.” If the garage door opener/device activates, programming is complete. To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the channels. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button (Non-Rolling Code) To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps: 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. 2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the button. It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. For vehicle’s equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, place the ignition in the RUN position with the Engine ON. 2. Place the hand - held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to program. 3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining steps. 3. Push and hold the HomeLink button while you push and release (“cycle”), your hand - held transmitter every two seconds. Canadian/Gate Operator Programming 4. Continue to hold both buttons until the instrument cluster display changes from “CHANNEL # TRAINING” to “CHANNEL # TRAINED,” then release both buttons. For programming transmitters in Canada/United States that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after several seconds of transmission. Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in the same manner. NOTE: • It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cases for the channel to train. • If the instrument cluster display shows “DID NOT TRAIN”, repeat from Step 2. 3 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button. The instrument cluster display will display “CHANNEL # TRANSMIT.” If the device is plugged in and activates, programming is complete. If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for programming, plug it back in at this time. Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button (Canadian/Gate Operator) Using HomeLink To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the programmed device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.) The hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time. Security To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, follow these steps: It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. To erase the channels press and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds. The instrument cluster display will display “CLEARING CHANNELS.” Release the buttons when the instrument cluster display shows “CHANNELS CLEARED.” For vehicle’s equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, place the ignition in the RUN position with the Engine ON. 2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the instrument cluster display shows “CHANNEL # TRAINING” Do not release the button. 3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Canadian/ Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and follow all remaining steps. The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active. Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here are some of the most common solutions: • Replace the battery in the Garage Door Opener handheld transmitter. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 • Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code. • Did you unplug the device for programming and remember to plug it back in? If you have any problems, or require assistance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for information or assistance. WARNING! • Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death. • Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets or other objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal safety standards. This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance. General Information This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE: • The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the device. 3 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS The auxiliary 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlets can provide power for in-cab accessories designed for use with the standard “cigar lighter” plug. The 12 Volt power outlets and USB Port (Charge Only) have a cap attached to the outlet indicating “12V DC,” together with either a key symbol, battery symbol, or USB symbol. A key symbol indicates that the key must be in the ON/RUN or ACC positions for the outlet to provide power. The battery symbol indicates that the outlet is connected to the battery, and can provide power at all times. NOTE: To ensure proper operation, a MOPAR knob and element must be used. CAUTION! • Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watts (13 Amps) power rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced. • Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 The auxiliary power outlets can be found in the following locations: • Center console when equipped with bucket seats. • Lower left and lower right of the center stack when equipped with a bench seat. 3 Power Outlet — Center Console Power Outlets — Center Stack 1 — Power Outlet 2 — USB Port (Charge Only) 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE • Inside the upper lid of the center storage compartment — if equipped. • Rear of the center console storage compartment — Quad Cab or Crew Cab. USB Port (Charge Only) — Upper Lid Power Outlet — Rear Center Console UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 3 Power Outlet — Rear Center Console Fuse Power Outlet Fuse Locations 1 — F104 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Center Console Bin / USB Port (Charge Only) 2 — F90–F91 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Rear Center Console 3 — F93 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel When the vehicle is turned off, be sure to unplug any equipment as to not drain the battery of the vehicle. All accessories connected to the outlet(s) should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against discharge. 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! CAUTION! (Continued) To avoid serious injury or death: • Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet. • Do not touch with wet hands. • Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle. • If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure. CAUTION! • Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting. • Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will discharge the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution. (Continued) • After the use of high power draw accessories, or long periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery. AUXILIARY SWITCHES — IF EQUIPPED There can be up to five auxiliary switches located in the lower switch bank of the instrument panel which can be used to power various electronic devices and PTO (Power Take Off) – If Equipped. If Power Take Off is equipped, it will take the place of the fifth Auxiliary switch. Connections to the switches are found under the hood in the connectors attached to the auxiliary Power Distribution Center. You have the ability to configure the functionality of the auxiliary switches via the instrument cluster display. All switches can now be configured for setting the switch type operation to latching or momentary, power source of either battery or ignition, and ability to hold last state across key cycles. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 NOTE: Holding last state conditions are met when switch type is set to latching and power source is set to ignition. For further information on using the auxiliary switches, please refer to the Ram Body Builders Guide by accessing www.rambodybuilder.com and choosing the appropriate links. The power inverter is designed with built-in overload protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the inverter should automatically reset. CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER — IF EQUIPPED A removable ash receiver and cigar lighter are available. For vehicles with a bench seat, the cupholder tray can be used to hold the ash receiver. For vehicles equipped with a floor console, the cupholders may be used. POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED A 115 Volt (150 Watts Maximum) outlet is located on the center stack of the instrument panel, to the right of the radio. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts. Certain high-end video game consoles will exceed this power limit, as will most power tools. Power Inverter Outlet To turn on the power outlet, simply plug in the device. The outlet automatically turns off when the device is unplugged. NOTE: Due to built-in overload protection, the power inverter will shut down if the power rating is exceeded. 3 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! To avoid serious injury or death: • Do not insert any objects into the receptacles. • Do not touch with wet hands. • Close the lid when not in use. • If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric shock and failure. Front Instrument Panel Cupholders — Floor Storage Bin For vehicles equipped with bucket seats two cupholders are located next to the center console storage bin. CUPHOLDERS Front Seat Cupholders (40–20–40 Seats) The cupholders are located on the backside of the center portion of the front seat (20). Fold down the center section of the front seat to gain access to the cupholders. Front Cupholders For Bucket Seats UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 Rear Cupholders — If Equipped Some vehicles are equipped with rear cupholders located in the center armrest. Some vehicles may be equipped with a rear cupholder that consists of two cup wells for rear passenger convenience. 3 Rear Cup Wells Rear Armrest Cupholder 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE STORAGE Glove Compartment To open the upper glove compartment, push upward on the handle release. The glove compartment door will automatically open. The glove compartment is located on the passenger side of the instrument panel and features both an upper and lower storage area. Upper Glove Compartment Glove Compartment 1 — Upper Glove Compartment 2 — Lower Glove Compartment UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 To open the lower glove compartment, pull on the handle to release the latch and lower the glove compartment door. Door Storage Front Door Storage — If Equipped Storage areas and bottle holders (driver’s side only) are located in the door trim panels. Lower Glove Compartment Front Door Storage 3 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Rear Door Storage — If Equipped Storage compartments are located in both the driver and passenger rear door trim panels. Center Storage Compartment WARNING! Rear Door Storage Center Storage Compartment — If Equipped The center storage compartment is located between the driver and passenger seats. The storage compartment provides an armrest and contains both and upper and lower storage area. • This armrest is not a seat. Anyone seated on the armrest could be seriously injured during vehicle operation, or a collision. Only use the center seating position when the armrest is fully upright. • In a collision, the latch may open if the total weight of the items stored exceeds about 10 lbs (4.5 kg). These items could be thrown about endangering occupants of the vehicle. Items stored should not exceed a total of 10 lbs (4.5 kg). UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 Pull on the upper handle on the front of the armrest to raise the cover. The upper storage area contains a USB power outlet that can be used to power small electrical devices, refer to “Electrical Power Outlets” for further information. 3 Lower Storage Bin WARNING! Upper Storage Compartment With the upper lid closed, pull on the lower handle to open the lower storage bin. Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Driving with the console compartment lid open may result in injury in a collision. 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE The center console is equipped with a front storage bin located next to the cupholders. This storage bin may be equipped with a manual sliding top door. Front Storage Bin With Door — If Equipped Seatback Storage Located in the back of both the driver and passenger front seats are pockets that can be used for storage. Driver’s Side Seatback Storage UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 Storage (Regular Cab) Storage and Seats (Crew Cab/Quad Cab) The storage bin is located behind the front seats and runs the length of the cab. The Crew Cab and Quad Cab models provide additional storage under the rear seats. Lift the seats to access the storage compartment. To open the storage compartments, unsnap the securing snap located at either side of the load floor and lift upward on the fold flat lid. Storage Bin Crew Cab Storage NOTE: For more information on storage and the fold flat floor, refer to “Fold Flat Load Floor” in this section. 3 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers (Regular Cab Models) Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag handles are built into the back panel of the cab, behind the rear seat. REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Defroster The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control panel. Push this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation, push the button a second time. NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating. CAUTION! Grocery Bag Hooks Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements: • Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water. (Continued) UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 CAUTION! (Continued) • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. • Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. Manual Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped A locking device in the center of the window helps to prevent entry from the rear of the vehicle. Squeeze the lock to release the window. Power Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped FOLD FLAT LOAD FLOOR — IF EQUIPPED The switch for the power sliding rear window is located on the overhead console. Quad Cab and Crew Cab models with a 60/40 rear seat may be equipped with a folding load floor. WARNING! Do not operate the vehicle with loose items stored on the load floor. While driving or in an accident you may experience abrupt stopping, rapid acceleration, or sharp turns. Loose objects stored on the load floor may move around with force and strike occupants, resulting in serious or fatal injury. Rear Window Switch Push the switch to the right to open the glass. Pull the switch to the left to close the glass. 3 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Unfolding The Load Floor/Quad Cab 1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward position. Unfolding The Load Floor 2. Grasp the knob on the load floor and lift the knob until the load floor unfolds into position. Load Floor In Open Position 3. Reverse the procedure to store the load floor. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185 Unfolding The Load Floor/Crew Cab 2. Unfold both the legs using the straps. 1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward position. 3 Load Floor Legs In Opened Position Load Floor Legs In Stowed Position 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 3. Lift the front panel until the load floor unfolds into position. Positioning The Load Floor For Storage Access Under The Seat 1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward position. 2. Unsnap the securing snap located at either side of the load floor. 3. Lift the load floor up to access storage under the load floor. WARNING! Load Floor In Open Position 4. Reverse the procedure to store the load floor. Do not drive with the load floor in the up position. When stopping fast or in an accident, the load floor could move to the down position causing serious injury. UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187 Quad Cab — If Equipped Crew Cab — If Equipped 3 Load Floor Securing Straps/Quad Cab Load Floor Securing Straps/Crew Cab 4. Reverse the procedure to put the load floor back in the secured down position before you operate the vehicle. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS 䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . .191 䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192 䡵 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS . . . . . . . .196 ▫ Red Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197 ▫ Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . .204 ▫ Green Telltale Indicator Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . .215 ▫ Blue Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217 ▫ White Telltale Indicator Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . .217 䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . .218 ▫ Instrument Cluster Display Controls . . . . . . . . .218 ▫ Instrument Cluster Display Screens . . . . . . . . . .221 ▫ Oil Life Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223 ▫ Instrument Cluster Display Selectable Menu Items . .224 ▫ Instrument Cluster Display Messages . . . . . . . . .230 ▫ Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message — Electrical Load Reduction Actions — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 䡵 CYBERSECURITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234 䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236 ▫ Buttons On The Faceplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237 ▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237 ▫ Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 5.0 Personal Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . .237 ▫ Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Personal Settings . . . . . .255 䡵 UCONNECT RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .273 䡵 IPOD/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED. . . .273 䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274 ▫ Radio Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274 4 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ▫ CD Player — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274 ▫ Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . .275 ▫ Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302 䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES . . .275 ▫ Voice Text Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304 ▫ Regulatory And Safety Information . . . . . . . . . .275 ▫ Climate (8.4/8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305 䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277 ▫ Navigation (8.4 /8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305 ▫ Manual Climate Controls Without A Touchscreen — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277 ▫ Uconnect Access (8.4/8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . .306 ▫ Climate Controls With a Touchscreen . . . . . . . . .282 ▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290 ▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291 䡵 PERSONALIZED MENU BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293 䡵 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION . . . . . . . . .294 ▫ Introducing Uconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294 ▫ Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295 ▫ Basic Voice Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296 ▫ Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298 ▫ Vehicle Health Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307 ▫ Register (8.4/8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307 ▫ Mobile App (8.4/8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308 ▫ Voice Texting (8.4/8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308 ▫ Yelp (8.4/8.4 NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310 ▫ SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4/8.4 NAV). . . . . . . . . .311 ▫ Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311 ▫ Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314 ▫ Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 4 1 — Headlight Switch 7 — 115v Power Inverter Outlet 2 3 4 5 6 8 — Power Outlet — If Equipped 9 — Lower Switch Bank 10 — Instrument Panel Drawer 11 — Climate Controls 12 — Power Outlet/Cigar Lighter — If Equipped — — — — — Instrument Cluster Radio Hazard Switch Upper Glove Compartment Lower Glove Compartment 13 — Gear Selector/Transfer Case Position Switch — If Equipped 14 — Ignition Switch 15 — Hood Release 16 — Parking Brake Release 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER Base Instrument Clusters 1. Tachometer • Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute (RPM x 1000). 2. Instrument Cluster Display • When the appropriate conditions exist, this display shows the Instrument Cluster Display messages. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 3. Speedometer • Indicates vehicle speed. 4. Fuel Gauge • The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position. The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the • vehicle where the fuel door is located. 5. Temperature Gauge • The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily. • The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range. WARNING! A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph. CAUTION! Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service. 4 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Premium Instrument Clusters 1. Tachometer • Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute (RPM x 1000). 2. Voltmeter • When the engine is running, the gauge indicates the electrical system voltage. The pointer should stay within the normal range if the battery is charged. If the pointer moves to either extreme left or right and remains there during normal driving, the electrical system should be serviced. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 NOTE: The voltmeter may show a gauge fluctuation at various engine temperatures. This cycling operation is caused by the post-heat cycle of the intake manifold heater system. The number of cycles and the length of the cycling operation is controlled by the engine control module. Postheat operation can run for several minutes, and then the electrical system and voltmeter needle will stabilize. 3. Oil Pressure Gauge • The pointer should always indicate some oil pressure when the engine is running. A continuous high or low reading under normal driving conditions may indicate a lubrication system malfunction. Immediate service should be obtained from an authorized dealer. 4. Speedometer • Indicates vehicle speed. 5. Fuel Gauge • The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position. The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the • vehicle where the fuel door is located. 6. Instrument Cluster Display • When the appropriate conditions exist, this display shows the Instrument Cluster Display messages. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. 7. Temperature Gauge • The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily. • The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range. 4 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL WARNING! A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph. CAUTION! Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service. WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS The warning/indicator lights switch on in the instrument panel together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These indications are indicative and precautionary and as such must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the information contained in the Owner’s Manual, which you are advised to read carefully in all cases. Always refer to the information in this chapter in the event of a failure indication. All active telltales will display first if applicable. The system check menu may appear different based upon equipment options and current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 Red Telltale Indicator Lights Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light Red Telltale Light What It Means Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN position, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. Air Bag Warning Light Red Telltale Light What It Means Air Bag Warning Light This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. 4 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Brake Warning Light Red Telltale Light English Metric What It Means Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir. If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the Brake Booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop. NOTE: Brake Warning Light may illuminate due to excessive wear to brake pads. The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level. The light will remain on until the cause is corrected. NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and the brake fluid level checked. If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 WARNING! Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately. Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer. The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition placed in the ON/RUN position. NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application. CAUTION! In the event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required. Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped Red Telltale Light What It Means Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed. 4 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Engine Temperature Warning Light Red Warning Light What It Means Engine Temperature Warning Light This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As engine coolant temperatures rise and the gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. Further overheating will cause a continuous chime sound for 4 minutes, or until the engine is allowed to cool, whichever comes first. If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. Battery Charge Warning Light Red Telltale Light What It Means Battery Charge Warning Light This light illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the engine is running, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system or a related component. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 Oil Pressure Warning Light Red Telltale Light What It Means Oil Pressure Warning Light This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns on. Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light Red Telltale Light What It Means Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If the light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer. 4 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Electric Power Steering Fail Warning Light — If Equipped Red Telltale Light What It Means Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If Equipped This light is used to manage the electrical warning of the EPS (Electric Power Steering). Refer to “Power Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light Red Warning Light What It Means Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light This telltale is on when the Trailer Brake has been disconnected. Oil Temperature Warning Light Red Telltale Light What It Means Oil Temperature Warning Light This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 Door Open Warning Light Red Telltale Light What It Means Door Open Warning Light This indicator will illuminate when a door is open and not fully closed. NOTE: If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single chime. NOTE: Door Open Warning Light will differ depending on the equipped instrument cluster display. 4 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) Yellow Telltale Light What It Means Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly. Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing. When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 WARNING! CAUTION! A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others. Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine control system. It also could affect fuel economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required. 4 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped Yellow Telltale Light What It Means Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It should go out with the engine running. If the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected. • The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position. • Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it was turned off previously. • The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive. • This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC event. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped Yellow Telltale Light What It Means Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off. Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped Yellow Telltale Light What It Means Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low. 4 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light Yellow Telltale Light What It Means Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed. Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the indications corresponding to each tire in sequence. CAUTION! Do not continue driving with one or more flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and contact your authorized dealership as soon as possible. Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires. As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. CAUTION! The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your sensor function checked. 4 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Low Fuel Indicator Light Yellow Telltale Light What It Means Low Fuel Indicator Light When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal (11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until fuel is added. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light Yellow Telltale Light What It Means Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light After the ignition is turned on, the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) light illuminates to indicate function check at vehicle startup. If the light remains on after startup or comes on and stays on at road speeds, it may indicate that the ABS has detected a malfunction or has become inoperative. The system reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes. If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light are on, see an authorized dealer immediately. Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 Transmission Temperature Indicator Light Yellow Telltale Light What It Means Transmission Temperature Indicator Light This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this light turns on, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off. WARNING! CAUTION! If you continue operating the vehicle when the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire. Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure. 4 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Rear Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped Yellow Telltale Light What It Means Rear Fog Light Indicator This indicator will illuminate when the rear fog lights are on. Low Coolant Level Indicator Light Yellow Telltale Light What It Means Low Coolant Level Indicator Light This telltale will turn on to indicate the vehicle coolant level is low. TOW/HAUL Indicator Light Yellow Telltale Light What It Means TOW/HAUL Indicator Light This light will illuminate when TOW HAUL mode is selected. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 Cargo Light — If Equipped Yellow Telltale Light What It Means Cargo Light The cargo light will illuminate when the cargo light is activated by pushing the cargo light button on the headlight switch. Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light — If Equipped Yellow Telltale Light What It Means Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light — If Equipped This light will illuminate when the fuel filler cap is loose. Properly close the filler cap to disengage the light. If the light does not turn off, please see your authorized dealer. Service 4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped Yellow Telltale Light What It Means Service 4WD Indicator Light If the light stays on or comes on during driving, it means that the 4WD system is not functioning properly and that service is required. We recommend you drive to the nearest service center and have the vehicle serviced immediately. 4 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 4 Low Indicator Light — If Equipped Yellow Telltale Light What It Means 4 Low Indicator Light This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Low range provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the wheels. Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for further information on four-wheel drive operation and proper use. 4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped Yellow Telltale Light What It Means 4WD Indicator Light This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four-wheel drive mode, and the front and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 2WD Indicator Light — If Equipped Yellow Telltale Light What It Means 2WD Indicator Light This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the two-wheel drive mode. Green Telltale Indicator Lights Park/Headlight On Indicator Light Green Telltale Light What It Means Park/Headlight On Indicator Light This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on. Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped Green Telltale Light What It Means Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on. 4 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Turn Signal Indicator Lights Green Telltale Light What It Means Turn Signal Indicator Lights The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash independently for the left or right turn signal as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the multifunction lever is moved down (left) or up (right). NOTE: • A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on. • Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate. Cruise Control Set Indicator Light — If Equipped Green Telltale Light What It Means Cruise Control Set Indicator Light — If Equipped This light will turn on when the speed control has been set. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 Blue Telltale Indicator Lights High Beam Indicator Light Blue Telltale Light What It Means High Beam Indicator Light This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on, ⬙flash to pass⬙ scenario. White Telltale Indicator Lights Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light White Telltale Light What It Means Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light This light will turn on when the speed control is on, but not set. 4 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Cruise Control SET Indicator Light — If Equipped White Telltale Light What It Means Cruise Control SET Indicator Light This light will turn on when the speed control is set. Refer to “Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information. INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY Instrument Cluster Display Controls Your vehicle may be equipped with an instrument cluster display, which offers useful information to the driver. With the ignition in the STOP/OFF position, opening/closing of a door will activate the display for viewing, and display the total miles (kilometers) in the odometer. Your instrument cluster display is designed to display important information about your vehicle’s systems and features. Using a driver interactive display located on the instrument panel, your instrument cluster display can show you how systems are working and give you warnings when they aren’t. The steering wheel mounted controls allow you to scroll through and enter the main menus and submenus. You can access the specific information you want and make selections and adjustments. The instrument cluster display features a driver-interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster. Base Instrument Cluster Display UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 • Fuel Economy Info • Trip A • Trip B • Stop/Start Info (If Equipped) • Audio • Trailer Tow • Stored Messages • Screen Setup Premium Instrument Cluster Display The instrument cluster display menu items may consist of the following: • Speedometer • Vehicle Info • Vehicle Settings (Not Equipped with a Uconnect 5.0 & 8.4 radio) 4 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The system allows the driver to select information by pushing the following instrument cluster display control buttons located on the left side of the steering wheel: • Down Arrow Button Push and release the down arrow button to scroll downward through the main menu items, submenu screen, and vehicle settings. • Right Arrow Button Push and release the right arrow button to access/select the information screens or submenu screens of a main menu item. Push and hold the RIGHT arrow button for two seconds to reset displayed/selected features that can be reset. • Left Arrow Button Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons • Up Arrow Button Push and release the up arrow button to scroll upward through the main menu items, submenu screen, and vehicle settings. Push and release the left arrow button to access/ select the information screens, submenu screens of a main menu item, or to return to the main menu. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 Instrument Cluster Display Screens The instrument cluster display screens are located in the center portion of the cluster and consists of seven sections: 1. Compass Display Displays the current direction. Refer to “Compass Settings” under “Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 5.0/8.4 Settings” for further information. 2. Temperature Display Displays the outside temperature in degrees Celsius or degrees Fahrenheit. 3. Main Screen Displays main menu, submenus, settings. Base Instrument Cluster Display 4. White Telltales 5. Amber Telltales 6. Red Telltales 4 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 7. Audio/Phone Information And Submenu Information 3. Selectable Information (Compass, Temp, Range to Empty, Trip A, Trip B, Average MPG, Trailer Trip (distance only), Trailer Brake Gain, Time) 4. Telltales/Indicators 5. Gear Selector Status 6. Selectable Menu Icons 7. 4WD Status 8. Selectable Gauge 2 (Trans Temp, Oil Temp, Oil Life, Trailer Brake, Current MPG) Premium Instrument Cluster Display The instrument cluster display screens are located in the center portion of the cluster and consists of eight sections: 1. Main Screen — The inner ring of the display will illuminate in grey under normal conditions, yellow for non critical warnings, red for critical warnings, and white for on demand information. 2. Audio / Phone Information and Submenu Information — Whenever there are sub-menus available, the position within the submenus is shown here. 9. Selectable Gauge 1 (Trans Temp, Oil Temp, Oil Life, Trailer Brake, Current fuel economy) The instrument cluster display area will normally display the main menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main menu. The main display area also displays “pop up” messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warning or information messages. These pop up messages fall into several categories: • Five Second Stored Messages When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of the UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 messages of this type are then stored (as long as the condition that activated it remains active) and can be reviewed from the “Messages” main menu item. As long as there is a stored message, an “i” will be displayed in the instrument cluster display’s compass/outside temp line. Examples of this message type are “Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out” and “Low Tire Pressure.” • Unstored Messages This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples of this message type are “Turn Signal On” (if a turn signal is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver leaves the vehicle). • Unstored Messages Until RUN These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are “Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar” and “Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start.” • Five Second Unstored Messages When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds and then returns to the previous screen. An example of this message type is “Automatic High Beams On.” Oil Life Reset Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message will display in the instrument cluster display after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal driving style. NOTE: Use the steering wheel instrument cluster display controls for the following procedure(s). Vehicles Equipped With Passive Entry 1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE START/STOP button and place the ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine). 2. Push and release the down arrow button to scroll downward through the main menu to “Vehicle Info.” 3. Push and release the right arrow button to access the ”Vehicle Info” screen, then scroll up or down to select “Oil Life.” 4. Push and hold the right arrow button to select “Reset”. 4 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 5. Push and release the down arrow button to select “Yes,” then push and release the right arrow button to select reset of the Oil Life to 100%. 6. Push and release the up arrow button to exit the instrument cluster display screen. Vehicles Not Equipped With Passive Entry 1. Without pushing the brake pedal, cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine). 2. Push and release the down arrow button to scroll downward through the main menu to “Vehicle Info.” 3. Push and release the right arrow button to access the “Vehicle Info” screen then scroll up or down to select “Oil Life.” 4. Push and hold the right arrow button to select “YES” by pushing the right arrow then push and release the right arrow button to select reset of the Oil Life to 100%. 5. Push and release the up arrow button to exit the instrument cluster display screen. NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle, the Oil Life indicator system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure. Instrument Cluster Display Selectable Menu Items Push and release the up or down arrow button until the desired selectable menu icon is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Speedometer Push and release the up or down arrow button until the speedometer menu item is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the right arrow button to cycle the display between mph and km/h. Vehicle Info Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Vehicle Info menu item is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. push and release the right arrow button to enter the submenus items of Vehicle Info. follow the directional prompts to access or reset any of the following Vehicle Info submenu items: • Tire Pressure • Air Suspension — If Equipped • Coolant Temp — If Equipped • Transmission Temp (Automatic only) • Oil Temp UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 • Oil Pressure — If Equipped Trip A/Trip B • Oil Life Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Trip menu item is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the right arrow button to enter the submenus of Trip A and Trip B. The Trip A or Trip B information will display the following: • Distance • Average fuel economy • Elapsed Time • Battery Voltage — If Equipped • Gauge Summary — If Equipped • Engine Hours Fuel Economy Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Fuel Economy menu item is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push and Hold the right arrow button to reset Average Fuel Economy. • Current Fuel Economy Gauge • Average Fuel Economy Value • Range To Empty • Dual Fuel Tank levels — If Equipped • Push and release the right arrow button to display the Fuel Tank Level submenu item. Your instrument cluster display will display the fuel levels of the Front and Rear fuel tanks. The fuel is automatically transferred from the Rear tank to the Front tank based on both tank levels. Fuel transfer is complete once the Front Fuel Level is greater than the Rear Fuel Level. Push and hold right arrow button to reset all information. Trailer Tow Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Trailer Tow menu item is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the right arrow button and the next screen will display the following trailer trip information: • Trip (trailer specific) Distance: Push and hold the right arrow button to reset the distance. • Trailer Brake • Output • Type • Gain 4 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Audio Vehicle Settings Menu Item Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Audio display icon is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the right arrow button to display the active source. Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the transmission is in PARK. Stored Messages Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Messages Menu item is highlighted. This feature shows the number of stored warning messages. Pushing the right arrow button will allow you to see what the stored messages are. When no messages are present, main menu icon will be a closed envelope. Screen Setup Menu Item Push and release the up or down arrow button until the Screen Setup menu item is highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push and release the right arrow button to enter the Screen Setup submenu. The Screen Setup feature allows you to change what information is displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the location that information is displayed. Push and release the up and down button until Settings displays in the instrument cluster display. Follow the prompts to display and set any of the following Vehicle Settings. NOTE: Your vehicle may be equipped with the following settings. • If equipped with a base radio (Non-Touchscreen) Vehicle Settings will be included in the instrument cluster display. • If equipped with a Touchscreen radio, the Vehicle Settings will be included in the radio head unit. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 1 Language Select Setting Names Abbreviated (Left Submenu Layer) Language 2 3 Units ParkSense Units ParkSense 4 5 6 7 Tilt Mirror in Reverse Rain Sensing Wipers Hill Start Assist Headlights Off Delay Tilt Mirror in R Auto Wipers Hill Start Assist Lights Off Delay 8 Illuminated Approach Lights w/ Unlock 9 10 11 12 Headlights On with Wipers Automatic Highbeams Daytime Running Lights Flash Lights with Lock Lights w/ Wipers Auto Highbeams Daytime Lights Lights w/ Lock Setting Names Sub-Menus (Right Submenu Layer) English, Spanish, French, Italian, German, Dutch U.S.; Metric • Notification — Sound Only; Sound & Display • Front Volume — Low; Medium; High • Rear Volume — Low; Medium; High On; Off On; Off On; Off 0 seconds; 30 seconds; 60 seconds; 90 seconds 0 seconds; 30 seconds; 60 seconds; 90 seconds On; Off On; Off On; Off On; Off 4 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Auto Lock Doors Auto Unlock Doors Sound Horn with Remote Start Sound Horn with Remote Lock Remote Unlock Sequence Key Fob Linked to Memory Passive Entry Remote Start Comfort System Easy Exit Seat Key-off Power Delay Setting Names Abbreviated (Left Submenu Layer) Auto Lock Doors Auto Unlock Doors Horn w/ Rmt Start Horn w/ Rmt Lock Remote Unlock Key in Memory Passive Entry Rmt Start Comfort Easy Exit Seat Power Off Delay 23 Commercial Settings Commercial 24 25 26 27 Aero Ride Height Mode Tire/Jack Mode Transport Mode Wheel Alignment Mode Aero Mode Tire/Jack Mode Transport Mode Wheel Alignment Setting Names • • • • Sub-Menus (Right Submenu Layer) On; Off On; Off On; Off On; Off Driver Door; All Doors On; Off On; Off On; Off On; Off Off; 45 seconds; 5 minutes; 10 minutes Aux Switches Power Take-Off PIN Setup ParkSense Setup On; Off On; Off On; Off On; Off UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 Setting Names 28 29 30 Horn w/ Remote Lower Lights w/ Remote Lower Trailer Select Setting Names Abbreviated (Left Submenu Layer) Horn w/ Rmt Lwr Lights w/ Rmt Lwr Trailer Select 31 Brake Type Brake Type 32 Trailer Name Trailer Name • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Sub-Menus (Right Submenu Layer) On; Off On; Off Trailer 1; Trailer 2; Trailer 3; Trailer 4 Light Electric; Heavy Electric; Light EOH; Heavy EOH Trailer # (# is equal to slot position) Boat Car Cargo Dump Equipment Flatbed Gooseneck Horse Tag Motorcycle Snowmobile Travel Utility 5th Wheel 4 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Setting Names 33 34 Compass Variance Calibrate Compass Setting Names Abbreviated (Left Submenu Layer) Compass Var Compass Cal Sub-Menus (Right Submenu Layer) 1-15 increments of 1 Cancel; Calibrate Turn Menu OFF — If Equipped • Fuel Low Push and release the right arrow button to exit the main menu. • Service Antilock Brake System Push and release any instrument cluster display control button to enter the instrument cluster display main menu again. • Service Power Steering Instrument Cluster Display Messages • Cruise Ready • Front Seatbelts Unbuckled • Cruise Set To XXX MPH • Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled • Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) “Inflate Tire To XX” • Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled • Service Airbag System • Traction Control Off • Service Electronic Throttle Control • Cruise Off • Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS) • Service Tire Pressure System • Washer Fluid Low • Parking Brake Engaged • Oil Pressure Low • Brake Fluid Low • Oil Change Due • Service Electronic Braking System UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 • Engine Temperature Hot • Remote Start Aborted Trunk Open • Battery Voltage Low • Remote Start Aborted Time Expired • Service Electronic Throttle Control • Remote Start Disabled Start To Reset • Lights On • Service Airbag System • Right Turn Signal Light Out • Service Airbag Warning Light • Left Turn Signal Light Out • Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled • Turn Signal On • Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled • Sound Horn With Remote Lock: Off; 1st Press; 2nd Press • Front Seatbelts Unbuckled • Vehicle Not In Park • Door Open • Key In Ignition • Doors Open • Key In Ignition Lights On • Gear Not Available • Remote Start Active Key To Run • Shift Not Allowed • Remote Start Active Push Start Button • Shift to Neutral Then Drive Or Reverse • Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low • Autostick Unavailable Service Required • Remote Start Aborted Too Cold • Automatic Unavailable Use Autostick Service Req. • Remote Start Aborted Door Open • Transmission Getting Hot Push Brake • Remote Start Aborted Hood Open • Trans. Hot Stop Safely Shift To Park Wait To Cool 4 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • Transmission Cool Ready To Drive • Trailer Brake Disconnected • Service Transmission • Service Shifter • Engage Park Brake To Prevent Rolling • Transmission Too Cold Idle With Engine On • Washer Fluid Low The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the white telltales area on the right, yellow telltales in the middle, and red telltales on the left. Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message — Electrical Load Reduction Actions — If Equipped This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS) to perform additional monitoring of the electrical system and status of the vehicle battery. In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or the vehicle battery conditions are deteriorating, electrical load reduction actions will take place to extend the driving time and distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing power to or turning off non-essential electrical loads. Load reduction is only active when the engine is running. It will display a message if there is a risk of battery depletion to the point where the vehicle may stall due to lack of electrical supply, or will not restart after the current drive cycle. When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will appear in the instrument cluster. These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a low state of charge and continues to lose electrical charge at a rate that the charging system cannot sustain. NOTE: • The charging system is independent from load reduction. The charging system performs a diagnostic on the charging system continuously. • If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may indicate a problem with the charging system. Refer to “Battery Charge Warning Light” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 The electrical loads that may be switched off (if equipped), and vehicle functions which can be affected by load reduction: • Installing options like additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms and similar devices. • Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel • Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long parking periods). • Heated/Cooled Cup Holders — If Equipped • Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors • HVAC System • 115V AC Power Inverter System • Audio and Telematics System Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or more of the following conditions: • The charging system cannot deliver enough electrical power to the vehicle system because the electrical loads are larger than the capability of charging system. The charging system is still functioning properly. • Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads (e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior lights, overloaded power outlets +12V, 115V AC, USB ports) during certain driving conditions (city driving, towing, frequent stopping). • The vehicle was parked for an extended period of time (weeks, months). • The battery was recently replaced and was not charged completely. • The battery was discharged by an electrical load left on when the vehicle was parked. • The battery was used for an extended period with the engine not running to supply radio, lights, chargers, +12V portable appliances like vacuum cleaners, game consoles and similar devices. 4 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL What to do when an electrical load reduction action message is present (“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode”) During a trip: • Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible: – Turn off redundant lights (interior or exterior) – Check what may be plugged in to power outlets +12V, 115V AC, USB ports – Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature) – Check the audio settings (volume) After a trip: • Check if any aftermarket equipment was installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms) and review specifications if any (load and Ignition Off Draw currents). • Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, driving time and parking time). • The vehicle should have service performed if the message is still present during consecutive trips and the evaluation of the vehicle and driving pattern did not help to identify the cause. CYBERSECURITY Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These networks allow your vehicle to send and receive information. This information allows systems and features in your vehicle to function properly. Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless communications. Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar to a computer or other devices, your vehicle may require software updates to improve the usability and performance of your systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle systems. The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is installed. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235 WARNING! • It is not possible to know or to predict all of the possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems, including safety related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in an accident involving serious injury or death. • ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious software, and if installed in your vehicle, it may increase the possibility for vehicle systems to be breached. • As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized dealer immediately. NOTE: • FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regarding software updates. • To help further improve vehicle security and minimize the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners should: • Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/softwareupdate to learn about available Uconnect software updates. • Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g. personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs). Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept information and private communications without your consent. For further information, refer to “Privacy Practices – If Equipped with Uconnect 8.4 radio” in “All About Uconnect Access” in your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement and “Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity”. 4 236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL UCONNECT SETTINGS The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on the center of the instrument panel that allows you to access and change the customer programmable features. Many features can vary by vehicle. Uconnect 5.0 Buttons On The Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate 1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen 2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate Uconnect 3.0 Power Hard Button UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237 change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the center of the control knob one or more times to select or change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF). Your Uconnect system may also have Screen Off and Back buttons located below the Uconnect system. Push the Screen Off button to turn off the Uconnect touchscreen. Push the Screen Off button a second time to turn the touchscreen on. Push the Back button to exit out of a Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system. Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Buttons On The Touchscreen And Buttons On The Faceplate 1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen 2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate Buttons On The Faceplate Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition, there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right side of the Climate Controls in the center of the instrument panel. Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and Buttons On The Touchscreen Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the Uconnect display. Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 5.0 Personal Settings Push the MORE or SETTINGS button on the faceplate, then press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen (if equipped) to display the settings menu screen. In this mode the Uconnect system allows you to access programmable features that may be equipped such as Display, Units, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort (if equipped), Engine Off 4 238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Options, Trailer Brake, Audio, Compass Settings, Phone/ Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup (if equipped), Restore Settings, Clear Personal Data and System Information. on the touchscreen on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the list of available settings. NOTE: Only one category may be selected at a time. NOTE: All settings should be changed with the ignition in the RUN position. When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired mode, press and release the preferred setting until the button is highlighted. Once the setting is complete, either press the back arrow or the “Done” button on the touchscreen or the Back button on the faceplate to return to the previous menu. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow buttons Setting Name Display Mode Set Language Touchscreen Beep Fuel Saver Display Display After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available. Selectable Options Auto Manual English, Français, Español On On Off Off NOTE: The “Fuel Saver Display” feature will allow you to enable fuel saver mode and will be displayed in the instrument cluster display. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239 Units After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen, you may select each unit of measure independently displayed in the Instrument Cluster Display, and navigation system (if equipped). The following selectable units of measure are listed below: Setting Name Speed Distance Fuel Consumption Capacity Pressure Temperature Power Torque 4 Selectable Options MPH mi MPG (US) gal (US) km/h km MPG (UK) gal (UK) psi °C HP (US) HP (UK) lb-ft L/100 km L/100 km kpa km/L L bar °F kW Nm 240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Voice After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Voice Response Length Show Command List Selectable Options Brief Always Detailed With Help Never Clock & Date After pressing the “Clock & Date” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Set Time Selectable Options 12 hour 24 hour NOTE: Within the “Set Time” feature, press the corresponding arrow above and below the current time to adjust, then select “AM” or “PM.” Set Date Up Arrow Down Arrow UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241 Safety/Assistance After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name ParkSense — If Equipped Sound Only Selectable Options Sounds and Display NOTE: The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 7 mph (11 km/h). It will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. Front ParkSense Chime Low Med High Volume Rear ParkSense Chime Low Med High Volume — If Equipped Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped NOTE: When the “Tilt Mirrors In Reverse” feature is selected, the exterior side-view mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN position and the transmission gear selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE. 4 242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines NOTE: Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera display whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear. ParkView Backup Camera Delay NOTE: When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK or the ignition is switched to the OFF position. Rain Sensing Auto Wipers — If Equipped NOTE: When the “Rain Sensing Auto Wipers” feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield. Hill Start Assist — If Equipped NOTE: When the “Hill Start Assist” feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA) system becomes active. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243 Lights After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Headlight Off Delay Headlight Illumination On Approach Selectable Options 0 0 30 30 60 60 90 90 NOTE: When the “Headlight Illumination On Approach” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on when the doors are unlocked with the key fob. Headlights With On Off Wipers — If Equipped Auto Dim High On Off Beams — If Equipped Flash Lights With On Off Lock NOTE: When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob. This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. 4 244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Doors & Locks After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Auto Door Locks Selectable Options On Off NOTE: When the “Auto Door Locks” feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h). Auto Unlock On Exit On Off NOTE: When the “Auto Unlock On Exit” feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. Sound Horn With Lock Off 1st Press 2nd Press Remote Door Unlock All Driver NOTE: The “Remote Door Unlock” feature will allow you to program your remote door locks to open “All doors” or only the “Driver door” with the first push of the key fob or grabbing the Passive Entry door handle. Sound Horn With Remote On Off Start NOTE: When the “Sound Horn With Remote Start” feature is selected, the horn will sound when the remote start is activated. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245 Setting Name Memory Linked To Fob — If Equipped Selectable Options On Off NOTE: • The “Memory Linked To Fob” feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle. • The seat will return to the memorized seat location if “Memory Linked To Fob” is set to (On) when the key fob is used to unlock the door. Passive Entry — On Off If Equipped NOTE: The “Passive Entry” feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons. It automatically unlocks the doors when the outside door handle is grabbed. Flash Lights With Lock On Off NOTE: When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob. This feature may be selected with or without the “Sound Horn With Lock” feature selected. 4 246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped Selectable Options On Off NOTE: When the “Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start” feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will turn on. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247 Engine Off Options After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Easy Exit Seats — If Equipped Headlight Off Delay Engine Off Power Delay Selectable Options 4 0 sec 0 sec 30 sec 45 sec 60 sec 5 min 90 sec 10 min Trailer Brake After pressing the “Trailer Brake” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Trailer Select Trailer Brake Type Trailer 1 Light Electric Selectable Options Trailer 2 Trailer 3 Heavy Electric Light EOH Trailer 4 Heavy EOH 248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Audio After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Balance/Fade Selectable Options Speaker Icon (Arrow Buttons) C NOTE: The “Balance/Fade” feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade settings. Press and drag the speaker icon or use the arrows to adjust, tap the “C” icon to readjust to the center. Equalizer + – NOTE: When in the “Equalizer” display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble settings. Speed Adjusted Off 1 2 Volume NOTE: The “Speed Adjusted Volume” feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed. Surround Sound — On Off If Equipped NOTE: The “Surround Sound” feature provides simulated surround sound mode. 3 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249 Setting Name AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped Selectable Options On Off NOTE: The “AUX Volume Offset” feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input. Loudness — On Off If Equipped NOTE: The “Loudness” feature improves sound quality at lower volumes. 4 250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Compass Settings — If Equipped After pressing the “Compass Settings” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available: Setting Name Variance 1 2 3 4 5 Selectable Options 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 NOTE: • Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North. To compensate for the differences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly set, the compass will automatically compensate for the differences, and provide the most accurate compass heading. • Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones, Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass module is located, and it can cause interference with the compass sensor, and it may give false readings. Perform Compass On Off Calibration NOTE: Press the “Calibration” button on the touchscreen to change this setting. This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic until it is calibrated. You may also calibrate the compass by pressing the “ON” button on the touchscreen and completing one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic objects). The compass will now function normally. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251 4 Compass Variance Map Phone/Bluetooth After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available: Setting Name Paired Phones Selectable Options List of Paired Phones NOTE: The “Paired Phones” feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement. 252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Channel Skip Selectable Options List of Channels NOTE: SiriusXM can be programmed to exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip. Subscription Info Sirius ID NOTE: New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe. 1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen. 2. Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online. SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription and is available for U.S. residents only. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253 Restore Settings After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available: Setting Name Restore Settings Selectable Options Yes Cancel NOTE: When the “Restore Settings” feature is selected it will reset the Display, Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings. If “Yes” is selected a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?” select “Yes” to restore, or “Cancel” to exit. Clear Personal Data After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Clear Personal Data Selectable Options Yes Cancel NOTE: When this feature is selected it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets. If “Yes” is selected a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure you want to clear all personal data?” select “Yes” to Clear, or “Cancel” to exit. 4 254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL System Information After pressing the “System Information” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name System Information Selectable Options System Software Information Screen NOTE: When the “System Information” feature is selected, a “System Software Information” screen will appear, displaying the system software version. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255 Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Personal Settings Press the “Apps” button on the touchscreen then press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen to display the settings menu screen. In this mode the Uconnect system allows you to access programmable features that may be equipped such as Display, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort (if equipped), Engine Off Options, Trailer Brake, Audio, Phone/ Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup (if equipped), Restore Settings, Clear Personal Data and System Information. NOTE: Only one category may be selected at a time. When making a selection, press the button on the touchscreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired mode, press and release the preferred setting until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete, either press the back arrow button on the touchscreen or the Back button on the faceplate to return to the previous menu or press the “X” button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow buttons on the touchscreen on the right side of the screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the list of available settings. NOTE: All settings should be changed with the ignition in the RUN position. 4 256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Display After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Display Mode Day Selectable Options Night Auto NOTE: When Day or Night is selected for the Display Mode, the usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause the radio to activate the Display Brightness Day control even though the headlights are on. Display Brightness With + – Headlights ON NOTE: To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights ON⬙ setting, the headlights must be on and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions. Display Brightness With + – Headlights OFF NOTE: To make changes to the ⬙Display Brightness with Headlights OFF⬙ setting, the headlights must be off and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the ⬙party⬙ or ⬙parade⬙ positions. Set Theme Pre-configured Themes Set Language English, Français, Español NOTE: Arabic is available for the navigation system (if equipped) only. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257 Setting Name Touchscreen Beep Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If Equipped Controls Screen Time-Out — If Equipped Fuel Saver Display — If Equipped Selectable Options 4 258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Units After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen you may select each unit of measure independently displayed in the Instrument Cluster Display, and navigation system (if equipped). The following selectable units of measure are listed below: Setting Name Speed Distance Fuel Consumption Capacity Pressure Temperature Power Torque Selectable Options MPH mi MPG (US) gal (US) km/h km MPG (UK) gal (UK) psi °C HP (US) lb-ft After the desired setting has been selected, press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu. L/100 km L/100 km kPa km/L L bar °F HP (UK) kW Nm UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259 Voice After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Voice Response Length Show Command List Selectable Options Brief Always 4 Detailed With Help Never Clock After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Sync Time With GPS — If Equipped Set Time Hours Set Time Minutes Time Format Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped Selectable Options + + 12hrs – – 24hrs NOTE: The “Show Time In Status Bar” feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the digital clock in the status bar. 260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Safety & Driving Assistance After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name ParkSense Sound Only Selectable Options Sound and Display NOTE: The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 7 mph (11 km/h). Front ParkSense Chime Low Med High Volume Rear ParkSense Chime Low Med High Volume Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped NOTE: When the “Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse” feature is selected, the outside side-view mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN position and the transmission gear selector is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the transmission is shifted out of REVERSE. ParkView Backup Camera NOTE: Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear. The ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License plate. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261 Setting Name ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines Selectable Options On Off NOTE: Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see Active (Dynamic) Guidelines which deflect with steering wheel angle over the ParkView Back up Camera display whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear. ParkView Backup Camera On Off Delay NOTE: When the “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” feature is enabled, it will allow the ParkView Backup Camera display to remain on while in drive for up to 10 seconds, or 8 mph (12 km/h). Rain Sensing Auto Wipers On Off — If Equipped NOTE: When the “Rain Sensing Auto Wipers” feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the windshield. Hill Start Assist — On Off If Equipped 4 262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Lights After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Headlight Off Delay Selectable Options + – NOTE: When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle. Headlight Illumination On + – Approach NOTE: When the “Headlight Illumination On Approach” feature is selected, the headlights will activate and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the key fob. Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped NOTE: When the “Headlights With Wipers” feature is selected, and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263 Setting Name Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped Selectable Options NOTE: When the “Auto Dim High Beams” feature is selected, the high beam headlights will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. Flash Lights With Lock NOTE: When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the exterior lamps will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob. This feature may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. Doors & Locks After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Auto Door Locks Selectable Options NOTE: When the “Auto Door Locks” feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h). Auto Unlock On Exit NOTE: When the “Auto Unlock On Exit” feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. 4 264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Setting Name Flash Lights With Lock Selectable Options NOTE: When the “Flash Lights With Lock” feature is selected, the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the key fob. This feature may be selected with or without the “Sound Horn With Lock” feature selected. Sound Horn With Lock Off 1st Press 2nd Press Sound Horn With Remote Start 1st Press Of Key Fob Driver Door All Doors Unlocks NOTE: • When “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: Driver Door” is selected, only the driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the key fob unlock button. You must push the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. • When “All Doors” is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock button. • If the vehicle is programmed “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: All Doors”, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: Driver Door” is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. • With Passive Entry, if “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks: Driver Door” is programmed pushing the handle more than once will only result in the driver’s door opening. If “Driver Door” is selected, once the driver’s door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob). UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265 Setting Name Passive Entry — If Equipped Selectable Options NOTE: The “Passive Entry” feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons. Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob — If Equipped NOTE: • The “Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob” feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the vehicle. • The seat will return to the memorized seat location (if “Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob” is set to on) when the key fob is used to unlock the door. 4 266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Auto-On Driver Heated/ Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped Off Selectable Options Remote Start All Starts NOTE: When the “Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle Start” feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C), the driver vented seat will turn on. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267 Engine Off Options After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Engine Off Power Delay Selectable Options + 4 – NOTE: When the “Engine Off Power Delay” feature is selected, the power window switches, radio, Uconnect phone system (if equipped), DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. Headlight Off Delay + “– NOTE: When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle. Trailer Brake After pressing the “Trailer Brake” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Trailer Select Trailer Brake Type Trailer 1 Light Electric Selectable Options Trailer 2 Trailer 3 Heavy Electric Light EOH Trailer 4 Heavy EOH 268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Audio After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available: Setting Name Balance/Fade Selectable Options Speaker Icon (Arrow Buttons) C NOTE: The “Balance/Fade” feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade settings. Press and drag the speaker icon or use the arrows to adjust, tap the “C” icon to readjust to the center. Equalizer + – NOTE: When in the “Equalizer” display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble settings. Speed Adjusted OFF 1 2 Volume 3 NOTE: The “Speed Adjusted Volume” feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed. Surround Sound — On Off If Equipped NOTE: The “Surround Sound” feature provides simulated surround sound mode. AUX Volume Offset On — If Equipped Off NOTE: The “AUX Volume Offset” feature provides the ability to tune the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269 Phone/Bluetooth After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Paired Phones Selectable Options List Of Paired Phones NOTE: The “Paired Phones” feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement. Paired Audio Sources List Of Paired Audio Sources NOTE: The “Paired Audio Sources” feature shows which Audio Sources are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement. 4 270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Tune Start Selectable Options On Off NOTE: The “Tune Start” feature begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using one of the twelve presets, so you can enjoy the complete song. This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected during that current song. Tune Start works in the background, so you will not even realize it’s on, except that you will miss the experience of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to play. Channel Skip List of Channels NOTE: SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271 Setting Name Subscription Info Selectable Options Sirius ID NOTE: New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe. 1. Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen. 2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider online. SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription and is available for U.S. residents only. Restore Settings After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Restore Settings Selectable Options OK NOTE: When the “Restore Settings” feature is selected it will reset all settings to their default settings. Cancel 4 272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Clear Personal Data After pressing the “Clear Personal Data” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name Clear Personal Data Selectable Options OK Cancel NOTE: When the “Clear Personal Data” feature is selected it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth devices and presets. System Information After pressing the “System Information” button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available: Setting Name System Information Selectable Options System Software Information Screen NOTE: When the “System Information” feature is selected, a “System Software Information” screen will appear, displaying the system software version. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273 UCONNECT RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED For detailed information about your Uconnect radio, refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement. IPOD/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED Located inside the center console upper lid, this feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be plugged into the USB port. iPod control supports the following: iPod/iPod classic, iPod mini, iPod nano, iPod shuffle, iPod touch, and iPhone devices. Some iPod software versions may not fully support the iPod control features. Please visit Apple’s website for software updates. 4 Center Console USB/AUX Media Hub 1 — USB Port 2— Aux Jack For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement or visit UconnectPhone.com. 274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF EQUIPPED The remote sound system controls are located on the back surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to access the switches. The button located in the center of the right hand control will switch modes to Radio, CD or other valid audio sources. The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a push-button in the center. The function of the left hand control is different depending on which mode you are in. The following describes the left hand control operation in each mode. Radio Operation Pushing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch will SEEK down for the next listenable station. The button located in the center of the left hand control will tune to the next pre-set station that you have programmed in the radio pre-set buttons. Remote Sound System Controls (Rearview Of Steering Wheel) The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a push-button in the center. Pushing the top of the switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of the switch will decrease the volume. CD Player — If Equipped Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD. Pushing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within eight seconds after the current track begins to play. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275 If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the second track. If you push the switch up or down three times, it will play the third, etc. CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following precautions: NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known good disc before considering disc player service. RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES 4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, or anti-static sprays. Under certain conditions, an “on” mobile device in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile device antenna. This condition is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile device operation when not using Uconnect (if equipped). 5. Store the disc in its case after playing. Regulatory And Safety Information 6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight. USA/CANADA 7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high. Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation 1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the surface. 2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth, wiping from center to edge. 3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching the disc. The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a manner that the radio is 20 cm or further from the human body. 4 276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific community. The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. However, the use of wireless radios may be restricted in some situations or environments, such as aboard airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask for authorization before turning on the wireless radio. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE: • This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. • If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: • Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. • Consult the dealer or an experienced radio technician for help. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277 CLIMATE CONTROLS The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the temperature, airflow, and direction of air circulating throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the instrument panel below the radio. Manual Climate Controls Without A Touchscreen — If Equipped The controls for the manual heating and air conditioning system in this vehicle consist of a series of outer rotary dials and inner push knobs. These comfort controls can be set to obtain desired interior conditions. Manual Climate Controls Without A Touchscreen 4 278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Manual Climate Control Descriptions Icon Description MAX A/C Setting Rotate the Temperature Control Knob counterclockwise until it is set to MAX A/C. This is the coldest setting and will put the A/C to its maximum power. A/C Button Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning (A/C). A LED will illuminate when the A/C system is engaged. Recirculation Button Push and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. NOTE: • Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended. • The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on the inside, because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air position for maximum defogging. • Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost. • The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279 Icon Description Front Defrost Setting Turn the Mode Control knob to the Defrost mode. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost setting is selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. Rear Defrost Button Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes. Temperature Control Use this control knob to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the knob counterclockwise, from top center into the blue area of the scale, indicates cooler temperatures. Rotating the knob clockwise, into the red area, indicates warmer temperatures. Blower Control There are seven blower speeds. Use this control knob to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select. The blower speed increases as you move the control clockwise from the off position. NOTE: Depending on the configuration, your vehicle may be equipped with four blower speeds. 4 280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Icon Description Modes Control: Rotate the Mode Control Knob to change the airflow distribution mode. The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows: Panel Mode Panel Mode Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets. Bi-Level Mode Bi-Level Mode Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets. Floor Mode Mix Mode NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets. Floor Mode Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets. Mix Mode Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281 Economy Mode If ECONOMY mode is desired, push the A/C button to turn off the LED indicator and the A/C compressor. Rotate the temperature control knob to the desired temperature. Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes. Stop/Start System — If Equipped While in an Autostop, the Climate Controls system may automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin comfort. Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an engine running condition. CAUTION! Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements: • Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water. • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. • Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. 4 282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Climate Controls With a Touchscreen 5.0 With Automatic Temperature Controls UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283 4 8.4/8.4 NAV With Manual Temperature Controls 284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 8.4/8.4 NAV With Automatic Temperature Controls UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285 Control Descriptions NOTE: Icons and descriptions can vary based upon vehicle equipment. Icon Description MAX A/C Button Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Performing this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off. A/C Button Press and release the button on the touchscreen, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is on. Recirculation Button Press and release this button to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. NOTE: • Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended. • The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp weather could cause windows to fog on the inside, because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select the outside air position for maximum defogging. • Recirculation can be used in all modes except for Defrost. • The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection. 4 286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Icon Uconnect 5.0 Uconnect 8.4 Description AUTO Button — If Equipped Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Toggling this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for more information. Front Defrost Button Press and release the touchscreen button, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is on. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. When toggling the front defrost mode button, the climate system will return to previous setting. Rear Defrost Button Push and release the button on the touchscreen, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 10 minutes. Driver and Passenger Temperature Up and Down Buttons — If Equipped Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the up arrow button on the faceplate, press the up arrow button on the touchscreen, or press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature settings. Push the down arrow button on the faceplate, press the down arrow button on the touchscreen, or press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow button on the touchscreen UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287 Icon Description for cooler temperature settings. When the SYNC feature is active, the passenger’s temperature will move up and down with the driver’s temperature, when it is increased and decreased, respectively. 4 Faceplate Knob Touchscreen Buttons SYNC Button — If Equipped Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is illuminated when this feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. The SYNC feature also synchronizes the rear passengers’ temperature to the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger temperature setting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature. Blower Control Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds available. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen. • Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise. • Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting. Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons. 288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Icon Panel Mode Bi-Level Mode Floor Mode Mix Mode Description Panel Mode Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets. Bi-Level Mode Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets. NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets. Floor Mode Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets. Mix Mode Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield. Climate Control OFF Button Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the faceplate button, to turn the Climate Control System off. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289 CAUTION! Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements: • Use care when washing the inside of the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water. • Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window. • Keep all objects a safe distance from the window. Climate Control Functions A/C (Air Conditioning) The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning system. When the air conditioning system is turned on, cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C button to turn off the air conditioning and manually adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes. NOTE: • If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass, select Defrost mode and increase blower speed if needed. • If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from the front of the radiator and through the condenser. MAX A/C MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling performance. Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the prior settings. The button illuminates when MAX A/C is on. In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the selected setting and MAX A/C to exit. Recirculation When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish to recirculate interior air by pressing the Recirculation control button. The recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button 4 290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL is selected. Press the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle. NOTE: In cold weather, use of recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation feature may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. On systems with Manual Climate Controls, the Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation. Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off. Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If Equipped Automatic Operation 1. Push the AUTO button on the front ATC panel and the word “AUTO” will illuminate in the front ATC display, along with two temperatures for the driver and front passenger. The system will then automatically regulate the amount of airflow. 2. Adjust the temperature you would like the system to maintain, by adjusting the driver, and passenger temperatures. Once the desired temperature is displayed, the system will achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level. 3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically. NOTE: • It is not necessary to move the temperature settings. The system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible. To provide you with maximum comfort in the automatic mode, during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain on low until the engine warms up. The fan will engage immediately if the Defrost mode is selected, or by changing the front blower knob setting. Manual Operation Override This system offers a full complement of manual override features. The AUTO symbol in the front ATC display will be turned off when the system is being used in the manual mode. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291 NOTE: The system will not automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or ice on the windshield. Defrost mode must be manually selected to clear the windshield and side glass. system at idle for about five minutes, in fresh air with the blower setting on high. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again. Operating Tips Window Fogging NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for suggested control settings for various weather conditions. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild, rainy and/or humid weather. To clear the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase the front blower speed. Do not use the Recirculation mode without A/C for long periods, as fogging may occur. Summer Operation The engine cooling system must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended. Winter Operation To ensure the best possible heater and defroster performance, make sure the engine cooling system is functioning properly and the proper amount, type, and concentration of coolant is used. Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recommended, because it may cause window fogging. Vacation/Storage Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow. Cabin Air Filter The climate control system filters out dust and pollen from the air. Contact your authorized dealer to service your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced when needed. 4 292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Operating Tips Chart UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293 PERSONALIZED MENU BAR 1. Press the “Apps The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar are easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow these steps: 2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace an existing shortcut in the main menu bar. ” button to open the App screen. The new app shortcut, that was dragged down onto the main menu bar, will now be an active App/shortcut. NOTE: This feature is only available if the vehicle is in PARK. Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Main Menu 4 294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION Introducing Uconnect Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect 3.0, 5.0 or 8.4/8.4 NAV system. Uconnect 5.0 Uconnect 3.0 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295 Get Started 1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instructions. 2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of noise that may impact recognition. 3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned in the headliner and aimed at the driver. 4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after the beep, then say your Voice Command. Uconnect 8.4 NAV If you see the icon on your touchscreen, you have the Uconnect 8.4 NAV system. If not, you have a Uconnect 8.4 system. 5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice Command from current category. 4 296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Two buttons are all you need to control your Uconnect system with your voice. Basic Voice Commands The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any point while using your Uconnect system. Push the VR button . After the beep, sayѧ • Cancel to stop a current voice session • Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands • Repeat to listen to the system prompts again Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the screen. Voice Recognition (VR)/Phone Buttons 1 — Push To Begin Radio, Media, Navigation, Apps And Climate Functions 2 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive A Text Uconnect 3.0 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297 4 Uconnect 5.0 Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV 298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Radio Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.) Push the VR button . After the beep, sayѧ • Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM • Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1 TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or want and say to learn a Voice Command, press the VR button “Help.” The system will provide you with a list of commands. Uconnect 3.0 Radio UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299 4 Uconnect 5.0 Radio Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Radio 300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Media Uconnect offers connections via USB, Bluetooth and auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only available for connected USB and iPod devices. (Remote CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.) TIP: For the Uconnect 3.0, Uconnect 5.0 and 8.4/8.4 NAV systems, select Browse to see all of the music on your iPod or USB device. Your Voice Command must match exactly how the artist, album, song and genre information is displayed. . After the beep, say one of the Push the VR button following commands and follow the prompts to switch your media source or choose an artist. • Change source to Bluetooth • Change source to iPod • Change source to USB • Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical Uconnect 3.0 Media UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301 4 Uconnect 5.0 Media Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Media 302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Phone Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated for the Uconnect 3.0, Uconnect 5.0 and 8.4/8.4 NAV radios, your system is ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and pairing instructions. Push the Phone button following commandsѧ TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone button and say “Call,” then pronounce the name exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call John Smith work.” . After the beep, say one of the • Call John Smith • Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts • Redial (call previous outgoing phone number) • Call back (call previous incoming phone number) Uconnect 3.0 Phone UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303 4 Uconnect 5.0 Phone Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Phone 304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Voice Text Reply Uconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push the Phone button and say Listen. (Must have compatible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.) 1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push the . After the beep, say: “Reply.” Phone button TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementation of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com. Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading incoming text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps: 2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system prompts. PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY Yes. Stuck in traffic. Start without No. me. Okay. Where are you? Are you there Call me. yet? I need I’ll call you later. directions. I’m on my way. Can’t talk right now. I’m lost. RESPONSES See you later. I’ll be late. I will beminutes late. See you in of minutes. Thanks. iPhone Notification Settings 1 2 3 4 — — — — Select “Settings” Select “Bluetooth” Select The (i) For The Paired Vehicle Turn On “Show Notifications” UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305 TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone, but if your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can use your voice to send a text message. Climate (8.4/8.4 NAV) Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep everyone comfortable while you keep moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate control.) 4 . After the beep, say one of the Push the VR button following commands: • Set driver temperature to 70 degrees • Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice command will not work to adjust the heated seat, vented seat, or the steering wheel, if equipped. Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV Climate Navigation (8.4 /8.4 NAV) The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and become more productive when you know exactly how to get to where you want to go. (Navigation is optional on the Uconnect 8.4 system. See your dealer to activate navigation at any time.) 1. To enter a destination, push the VR button . After the beep, say: • For the 8.4 Uconnect System, say: “Enter state.” 306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL • For the 8.4 NAV Uconnect System, say: “Find address 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.” Uconnect Access (8.4/8.4 NAV) WARNING! 2. Then follow the system prompts. TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.” . After ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1 and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network connection. NOTE: Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber. An included trial and/or subscription is required to take advantage of the Uconnect Access services in the next section of this guide. To register with Uconnect Access, press the Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get started. Detailed registration instructions can be found on the next page. NOTE: Uconnect Access is available only on equipped vehicles purchased within the continental United States, Alaska and Hawaii. Services can only be used where coverage is available; see coverage map for details. Uconnect 8.4 NAV Navigation 9-1-1 Call Security Alarm Notification Remote Door Lock/Unlock UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307 Stolen Vehicle Assistance 1. Push the ASSIST button on your rearview mirror. Remote Vehicle Start** Remote Horn and Lights Vehicle Finder Send ‘N Go 4 Yelp Search Voice Texting Roadside Assistance Call 3G Wi-Fi Hotspot*** **If vehicle is equipped. Assist Button ***Extra charges apply. 2. Press the “Uconnect Care” button on the touchscreen. Vehicle Health Alert 3. A helpful Uconnect Care Agent will register your vehicle and handle all of the details. Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it senses a problem under the hood with one of your vehicles key systems. For further information go to the Mopar Owner Connect website moparownerconnect.com. Register (8.4/8.4 NAV) To unlock the full potential of Uconnect Access in your vehicle, you first need to register with Uconnect Access. Signing up is easy! Simply follow the steps above. Or, press the “Apps ” button on the touchscreen to “Register By Web” to complete the process using your smartphone or computer. For further information please visit DriveUconnect.com. 308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Mobile App (8.4/8.4 NAV) You’re only a few steps away from using remote commands and sending a destination from your phone to your vehicle. • Once on the “Remote” screen, you can begin using Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Vehicle Start, and activate your horn and lights remotely, if equipped. • Press the “Location” button on the bottom menu bar of the app to bring up a map to locate your vehicle or send a location to your Uconnect Navigation using Vehicle Finder and Send ‘N Go , if equipped. • Press the “Settings” side menu in the upper left corner of the app to bring up app settings Voice Texting (8.4/8.4 NAV) 1. To send a message, push the Phone button . After the beep, say the following command: “Send message to John Smith.” Mobile App To use the Uconnect Access Mobile App:: • Once you have registered your Uconnect Access services, download the Uconnect Access app to your mobile device. Use your Owner Account login and password to open the app. 2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the message you would like to send. Wait for Uconnect to process your message. 3. The Uconnect system will repeat your message and provide a variety of options to add to, delete, send or hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect what you’d like to do. For instance, if you’re happy with your message, after the beep, say: “Send.” UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309 You must be registered with Uconnect Access and have a compatible MAP – enabled smartphone to use your voice to send a personalized text message. For details about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com. TIP: Apple iPhone iOS6 or later supports reading incoming text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps: • Messages are limited to 140 characters. iPhone Notification Settings 1 2 3 4 — — — — Select “Settings” Select “Bluetooth” Select The (i) For The Paired Vehicle Turn On “Show Notifications” • Voice Texting is not compatible with iPhone, but if your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can use your voice to send a text message. • The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be illuminated to use the feature. 4 310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Yelp (8.4/8.4 NAV) Once registered with Uconnect Access, you can use your voice to search for the most popular places or things around you. 1. Press the “Apps ” button on the touchscreen. 2. Press the “Yelp” button on the touchscreen. 3. Once the YELP home screen appears on the touchscreen, , then say: “YELP search.” push the VR button 4. Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell Uconnect the place or business that you’d like Uconnect to find. TIP: Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the results by selecting either the Best Match, Rating or Distance tab on the top of the touchscreen display. Yelp UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311 SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4/8.4 NAV) Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings, check a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast? SiriusXM Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a wealth of information right to your Uconnect 8.4 NAV system. (Not available for 8.4 system or vehicles sold in the Canadian market.) 4 . After the beep, say one of the Push the VR button following commands: • Show fuel prices • Show 5 - day weather forecast • Show extended weather TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command. SiriusXM Travel Link Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped Siri lets you use your voice to send text messages, select media, place phone calls and much more. Siri uses your natural language to understand what you mean and will respond back to confirm your requests. The system is designed to keep your eyes on the road and your hands on the wheel by letting Siri help you perform useful tasks. 312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL To enable Siri push and hold, then release the Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on the steering wheel. After you hear a double beep, you can ask Siri to play podcasts and music, get directions, read text messages, and many other useful requests. Getting Started Ensure Siri is enabled on your iPhone. Siri Enable Screens 1 — Select Settings On Your iPhone 2 — Select General Siri Eyes Free Available 3 — Select Siri 4 — Enable Siri 1. Pair your Siri enabled device to the vehicles sound system. Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for a detailed pairing procedure. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313 • ⬙Read text message from Sarah⬙ • ⬙Take me to the nearest coffee shop⬙ NOTE: • Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing straight ahead to ensure your command is understood. • Siri is available on iPhone 4S and later. Voice Recognition (VR)/Phone Buttons 1 — Push To Begin Radio, Media, Navigation, Apps And Climate Functions 2 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive A Text NOTE: A push and release of the button will start normal embedded VR functions. The push and hold, button will start Siri functions. then release of the 2. After the double beep, begin speaking to Siri. Examples of Siri commands and questions: • ⬙Play Rolling Stones⬙ • ⬙Send text message to John⬙ Siri Eyes Free 4 314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Do Not Disturb General Information With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes on the road and hands on the wheel. For your convenience, there is a counter display to keep track of your missed calls and text messages while you were using Do Not Disturb. This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text message, a call or both, when declining an incoming call and send it to voicemail. 2. This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operation. Automatic reply messages can be: NOTE: • “I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly.” NOTE: Only the first 25 characters can been seen on the touchscreen while typing a custom message. • The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the device. While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected so you can still place a second call without being interrupted by incoming calls. • The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. • Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 characters. NOTE: • Reply with text message is not compatible with iPhones. • Auto reply with text message is only available on phones that support Bluetooth MAP. 1. This device may not cause harmful interference. UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315 Additional Information © 2016 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp, Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered trademarks of Yelp. Uconnect System Support: • U.S. residents visit DriveUconnect.com or call: 1-877855-8400(24 hours a day 7 days a week) • Canadian residents visit DriveUconnect.ca or call: 1-800465-2001(English) or 1-800-387-9983(French) Mon. – Fri., 8:00 am – 8:00 pm, ET Sat., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET Sun., Closed Uconnect Access services support, call: 1-855-792-4241 Please have your Uconnect Security PIN ready when you call. 4 STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS 䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 ▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 ▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 ▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . .322 ▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322 ▫ Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F or −29°C) . .323 ▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323 䡵 POWER TAKE OFF OPERATION — IF EQUIPPED (CHASSIS CAB ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336 ▫ Stationary Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336 ▫ Mobile Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337 䡵 FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338 ▫ Manually Shifted Transfer Case — If Equipped . .338 ▫ After Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324 ▫ Electronically Shifted Transfer Case (Four-Position Switch) — If Equipped . . . . . . . .342 䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . .324 䡵 LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346 䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325 䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . . .347 ▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326 ▫ Acceleration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 ▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . . .327 ▫ Traction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 ▫ Six–Speed Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327 䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348 ▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348 5 318 STARTING AND OPERATING ▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348 ▫ Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped . . . .363 䡵 POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365 ▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350 ▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365 䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350 ▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . .369 䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352 ▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . . .370 ▫ Hydraulic Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352 ▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . .371 䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . . .353 䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . .376 ▫ Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). . . . . .353 ▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376 ▫ Brake System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 ▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377 ▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 ▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . . .378 ▫ Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 ▫ Tire Maintenance And Replacement . . . . . . . . . .378 ▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355 ▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378 ▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355 ▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 ▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . .358 ▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380 ▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . .358 ▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380 ▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . . .362 ▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382 ▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) — If Equipped . . . .362 ▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383 STARTING AND OPERATING 319 ▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383 ▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397 ▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384 ▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397 䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . . . .385 ▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles. . . . . . . . .398 䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . . .387 ▫ CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications . . . . . .398 ▫ Dual Rear Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388 ▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398 䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . .389 ▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399 ▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389 ▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389 ▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390 䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . . .390 ▫ Base System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392 ▫ Premium System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393 ▫ Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS) Chassis Cab — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395 ▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396 䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397 ▫ 6.4L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397 ▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399 ▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400 䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400 ▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . .401 䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401 ▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401 䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403 ▫ Common Towing Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404 ▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408 ▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . .408 5 320 STARTING AND OPERATING ▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408 ▫ General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418 ▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409 䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . .419 ▫ Towing Tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415 䡵 SNOWPLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416 ▫ Before Plowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416 ▫ Snowplow Prep Package Model Availability . . . .417 ▫ Over The Road Operation With Snowplow Attached . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417 ▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418 ▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle. . . .419 ▫ Recreational Towing — Two-Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420 ▫ Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420 STARTING AND OPERATING 321 STARTING PROCEDURES WARNING! (Continued) Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belt. The starter should not be operated for more than 10-second intervals. Waiting a few seconds between such intervals will protect the starter from overheating. WARNING! • When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the keyless ignition node is in the ⴖOFFⴖ mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector. • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. (Continued) • Do not leave children or animals inside parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may cause serious injury or death. Normal Starting Normal starting of either a warm or cold engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal. Cycle the ignition to the START position and release when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds, cycle the ignition to the OFF position, wait five seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure. Automatic Transmission Start the engine with the gear selector in the NEUTRAL or PARK. Apply the brake before shifting into any driving range. NOTE: This vehicle is equipped with a transmission shift interlocking system. The brake pedal must be pressed to shift out of PARK. 5 322 STARTING AND OPERATING Tip Start Feature Do not press the accelerator. Cycle the ignition switch briefly to the START position and release it. The starter motor will continue to run and will automatically disengage when the engine is running. Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of a button, as long as the Remote Start/ Keyless Enter-N-Go key fob is in the passenger compartment. Normal Starting To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button 1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL. 2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button once. 3. The system takes over and attempts to start the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically after 10 seconds. 4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to the engine starting, push the button again. NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal. To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/STOP Button 1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and release the ENGINE START/STOP button. 2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position. 3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/ STOP button must be held for two seconds or three short pushes in a row with the vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will shut off. The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC position until the gear selector is in PARK and the button is pushed twice to the OFF position. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once, the instrument cluster will display a “Vehicle Not In Park” message and the engine will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position, or it could roll. STARTING AND OPERATING 323 NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN (engine not running) position and the transmission is in PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF position. Idle Shutdown — 6.4L Engine Only This feature can be enabled so that the truck will automatically shutdown when the truck has been idling for a set period of time when the engine is at operating temperature. Idle time can be set in 5 minute increments between 5 and 60 minutes. See your local authorized dealer to enable this feature. NOTE: The idle shut down timer is disabled while the PTO is active. 2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to change the ignition to the ACC position. 3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time to change the ignition to the RUN position. 4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to return the ignition to the OFF position. Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F or −29°C) To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended. If Engine Fails To Start ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL Position) If the engine fails to start after you have followed the “Normal Starting” procedure, it may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there while the engine is cranking. This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded. The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an ignition switch. It has three positions, OFF, ACC, RUN. To change the ignition switch positions without starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps: The starter motor will engage automatically, run for 10 seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure. 1. Starting with the ignition in the OFF position: 5 324 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again. WARNING! • Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire causing serious personal injury. • Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle. • If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump-Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not have enough power to continue running when the ignition button/key is released. If this occurs, continue cranking with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release the accelerator pedal and the ignition button/key once the engine is running smoothly. If the engine shows no sign of starting after a 10 second period of engine cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the floor, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure. After Starting The idle speed is automatically controlled and will decrease as the engine warms up. ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord. Gasoline Engine Only The engine block heater cord is routed through the grille by the right front tow hook. STARTING AND OPERATING 325 It includes a removable cap that is secured by a tethered strap. It also has a c-clip that is used for storage when not in use for the Winter months. During Winter months, remove the heater cord wiring assembly from itself on the c-clip. NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while shifting out of PARK. The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine. • It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. • Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF (key removal) position, (or, with Keyless Enter-N-Go, when the ignition is in the OFF mode) the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. WARNING! Remember to disconnect the engine block heater cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION CAUTION! Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed: • Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. • Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle speed. • Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. WARNING! (Continued) 5 326 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle. • Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage. • Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the gear selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector. • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition (in a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go) in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. (Continued) Key Ignition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the ignition can be turned to the LOCK/OFF (key removal) position. The key fob can only be removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position, and the transmission is locked in PARK whenever the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position. NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the key fob in the ignition to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and stopped but the key fob cannot be removed until you obtain service. STARTING AND OPERATING 327 Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission out of PARK, the ignition must be turned to the ON/RUN mode (engine running or not) and the brake pedal must be pressed. Six–Speed Automatic Transmission — If Equipped Chassis Cab models (with automatic transmission) may use either the AS66RC transmission (which is equipped with a Power Take-Off (PTO) access cover on the side of the transmission case), or the 66RFE transmission (which has no PTO access cover). The transmission gear position display (located in the instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. The gear selector is mounted on the right side of the steering column. You must press the brake pedal to move the gear selector out of PARK (refer to “Brake/ Transmission Shift Interlock System” in this section). To drive, move the gear selector from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position. Pull the gear selector toward you when shifting into REVERSE or PARK, or when shifting out of PARK. The electronically-controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are selfcalibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles (kilometers). Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears. The transmission gear selector has only PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual downshifts can be made using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control (refer to “Electronic Range Select [ERS] Operation” in this section for further information). Pushing the ERS (-/+) switches (on the gear selector) while in the DRIVE position will select the highest available transmission gear, and will display that gear limit in the instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc. Some models will display both the selected gear limit, and the actual current gear, while in ERS mode. Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range. 5 328 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is especially important when the engine is cold. PARK (P) This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission. The engine can be started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range. When parking on a level surface, you may shift the transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking brake. When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. NOTE: On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the transfer case is in a drive position. When exiting the vehicle, always: • Apply the parking brake. • Shift the transmission into PARK. • Turn the engine OFF. • Remove the key fob. WARNING! • Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage. • Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the gear selector out of PARK with the brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle. • It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 329 WARNING! (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) • Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK, turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF (key removal) position (or, with Keyless Enter-N-Go, when the ignition is in the OFF mode), the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement. • When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector. • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave (Continued) the ignition (in a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go) in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. CAUTION! • Before moving the transmission gear selector out of PARK, you must turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode, and also press the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector could result. • DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this can damage the drivetrain. The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the transmission into the PARK position: • When shifting into PARK, pull the gear selector toward you and move it all the way counterclockwise until it stops. • Release the gear selector and make sure it is fully seated in the PARK gate. 5 330 STARTING AND OPERATING • Look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position (P). • With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector will not move out of PARK. REVERSE (R) This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop. NEUTRAL (N) Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running. The engine may be started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle. WARNING! Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision. CAUTION! Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. DRIVE (D) This range should be used for most city and highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission automatically upshifts through underdrive first, second, and third gears, direct fourth gear and overdrive fifth and sixth gears. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions. When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), use the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control (refer to “Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation” in this section for further information) to select a lower gear range. Under these conditions, using a lower STARTING AND OPERATING 331 gear range will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup. If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating limits, the powertrain controller will modify the transmission shift schedule and expand the range of torque converter clutch engagement. This is done to prevent transmission damage due to overheating. If the transmission becomes extremely hot or is in danger of overheating, the “Transmission Temperature Warning Light” may illuminate and the transmission may operate differently until the transmission cools down. NOTE: Use caution when operating a heavily loaded vehicle at low speeds (such as towing a trailer up a steep grade, or in stop-and-go traffic) during hot weather. In these conditions, torque converter slip can impose a significant additional heat load on the cooling system. Downshifting the transmission to the lowest possible gear (when climbing a grade), or shifting to NEUTRAL (when stopped in heavy traffic) can help to reduce this excess heat generation. During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque converter clutch is inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm (refer to the “Note” under “Torque Converter Clutch” in this section). On models with 66RFE transmission, top overdrive gear is also inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm, and during extremely cold temperatures (-16°F [-27°C] or below), operation may briefly be limited to first and direct gears only. On trucks with AS66RC transmission, fifth and sixth gears may be inhibited briefly on cold starts below 41°F (5°C), and during very cold temperatures (-4°F [-20°C] or below), operation may briefly be limited to third gear only. During this condition, the ability of the vehicle to accelerate under heavily loaded conditions may be reduced. In all cases, normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level. 5 332 STARTING AND OPERATING Transmission Limp Home Mode 5. Restart the engine. Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains in fourth gear (for 66RFE transmission) or third gear (for AS66RC transmission) regardless of which forward gear is selected. If an AS66RC equipped truck enters Limp Home Mode at highway speeds, it will initially engage fifth gear, until the vehicle slows to a speed where third gear can be engaged. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission. 6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no longer detected, the transmission will return to normal operation. In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps: 1. Stop the vehicle. 2. Shift the transmission into PARK. 3. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. 4. Wait approximately 10 seconds. NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur. If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer service is required. Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the driver to limit the highest available gear when the transmission is in DRIVE. For example, if you set the transmission gear limit to 4 (fourth gear), the transmission will not shift above fourth gear, but will shift through the lower gears normally. You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any vehicle speed. When the gear selector is in the DRIVE position, the transmission will operate automatically, shifting between all available gears. Tapping the ERS (-) switch will activate ERS mode, display the current gear in the STARTING AND OPERATING 333 instrument cluster, and set that gear as the top available gear. Once in ERS mode, tapping (-) or (+) will change the top available gear. WARNING! Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or personal injury. NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum deceleration (engine braking), simply push and hold the ERS (-) switch. The transmission will shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down. CAUTION! Column Gear Selector To exit ERS mode, simply push and hold the ERS (+) switch until the gear limit display disappears from the instrument cluster. When using ERS for engine braking while descending steep grades, be careful not to overspeed the engine. Apply the brakes as needed to prevent engine overspeed. Overdrive Operation The automatic transmission includes an electronically controlled Overdrive (fifth and sixth gears). The transmission will automatically shift into Overdrive if the following conditions are present: • The gear selector is in the DRIVE position. 5 334 STARTING AND OPERATING • The transmission fluid has reached an adequate temperature. • The engine coolant has reached an adequate temperature. • Vehicle speed is sufficiently high. • The TOW/HAUL switch has not been activated. • The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator. When To Use TOW/HAUL Mode When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting occurs, push the TOW/HAUL switch to activate TOW/HAUL mode. This will improve performance and reduce the potential for transmission overheating or failure due to excessive shifting. When operating in TOW/HAUL mode, transmission upshifts are delayed, and the transmission will automatically downshift (for engine braking) when the throttle is closed and/or during steady braking maneuvers. TOW/HAUL Switch The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in the instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL mode has been activated. Pushing the switch a second time restores normal operation. Normal operation is always the default at engine start-up. If TOW/HAUL mode is desired, the switch must be pushed each time the engine is started. STARTING AND OPERATING 335 WARNING! Do not use the “TOW/HAUL” feature when driving in icy or slippery conditions. The increased engine braking can cause the rear wheels to slide, and the vehicle to swing around with the possible loss of vehicle control, which may cause an accident possibly resulting in personal injury or death. Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle. A clutch within the torque converter engages automatically at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages. NOTE: • The torque converter clutch will not engage (and 66RFEequipped trucks will not shift to sixth gear), until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm [usually after 1 to 3 miles (2 to 5 km) of driving]. Because engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting properly when cold. This is normal. Using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control, when the transmission is sufficiently warm, will demonstrate that the transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive. • If the vehicle has not been driven for several days, the first few seconds of operation after shifting the transmission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to the fluid partially draining from the torque converter into the transmission. This condition is normal and will not cause damage to the transmission. The torque converter will refill within five seconds after starting the engine. 5 336 STARTING AND OPERATING POWER TAKE OFF OPERATION — IF EQUIPPED (CHASSIS CAB ONLY) This vehicle when equipped with PTO Prep and the AS66RC automatic six-speed, will allow for an aftermarket upfit with a transmission driven PTO (power take off). The customer will have the ability to operate the PTO in either a “stationary” or “mobile” mode. The vehicles will be factory set to the “stationary” mode. To select “mobile” mode, you will need to enter the commercial vehicle menu on the instrument cluster screen and select mobile PTO mode. Details of the PTO selection modes and further PTO information is available at the Ram Truck Bodybuilders web site. www.rambodybuilder.com AS66RC Six-Speed Automatic Transmission Only The PTO drive gear (part of the AS66RC) operates at torque converter turbine speed. The turbine speed will be less than engine speed when the torque converter clutch is not engaged and will be same as engine speed when the torque converter clutch is engaged. Stationary Mode To operate the PTO in this mode the vehicle must meet the following conditions: • Transmission in PARK position (vehicles equipped with automatic transmission.) • PTO switch has been activated. • Parking brake applied (vehicles equipped with manual transmission). • Brake pedal must not be applied. • Vehicle engine must be running. • No vehicle, brake or clutch switch faults present. • PTO must be correctly installed using the vehicle provided circuits. The instrument cluster will display a ⬙PTO On⬙ message for five seconds if the above conditions are met. Otherwise, the instrument cluster will display a message ⬙To Operate PTO Shift To Park⬙ indicating what operator action should be taken to engage the PTO mode. STARTING AND OPERATING 337 The customer has the choice to operate the PTO by utilizing the cruise control switches or by utilizing a remote control (provided by the PTO supplier). To operate the feature using the cruise control switches, the customer must first activate the PTO switch which will turn on the PTO. In order to increase or decrease the engine idle speed, to optimize the PTO function, the “RESUME/ACCEL” and “DECEL” cruise switches can be used respectively. To disengage PTO operation and return to “standard vehicle operation” simply toggle the PTO switch to the OFF position. manufacturer to ensure that their electrical (switches and remote) system is compatible with the vehicle’s electrical architecture and software functionality. The torque converter clutch (TCC) will automatically engage at engine speeds above 1,200 RPM (engine speed) in PTO stationary mode. Once engaged, the TCC will remain applied and will not disengage until the engine speed falls below 1,000 RPM. TCC engagement is desirable for certain types of PTO applications (Automatic Transmission Only). • Mobile mode is activated via the menu on the instrument cluster display. To operate the PTO via a remote switch, the customer must make sure the above conditions are met. It is vital for proper operation that the PTO and remote have been installed correctly, paying special attention to ensure the vehicle provided wiring has been connected properly. This is the responsibility of the installer of the PTO and switches/remote system. It is the responsibility of the PTO • Parking brake must not be applied. NOTE: Single set speed can be programmed via the PTO menu on the instrument cluster display. Further details are available at the Ram Truck Bodybuilders web site located at rambodybuilder.com Mobile Mode To operate the PTO in this mode the vehicle must meet the following conditions: • (ON/OFF) switch has been activated. • Vehicles with automatic transmission must be in PARK or DRIVE. • Brake pedal must not be applied. • No vehicle, brake or clutch switch faults present. • Vehicle engine must be running. 5 338 STARTING AND OPERATING • PTO must be correctly installed using the vehicle provided circuits. The customer may choose to use the PTO while the vehicle is moving. To do so, the PTO function must be activated prior to taking the vehicle out of PARK. This is accomplished by activating the upfitter-provided PTO on/off switch. At this point, the customer may place the vehicle in a forward or reverse gear and have PTO operation once the vehicle begins to move. To disengage PTO operation and return to “standard vehicle operation” simply toggle the on/off switch to the OFF position. NOTE: For application specific information with respect to PTO and pump requirements and additional vehicle information (wiring schematics, preset idle values, engine speed limits, and vehicle hardware and software requirements) please refer to the Body Builders Guide by accessing rambodybuilder.com and choosing the appropriate links. FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — IF EQUIPPED Four-wheel drive trucks are equipped with either a manually shifted transfer case or an electronically shifted transfer case. Refer to the operating instructions for your transfer case, located in this section for further information. Manually Shifted Transfer Case — If Equipped The transfer case provides four mode positions: • Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2H) • Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range (4H) • Neutral (N) • Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4L) For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position, see the information below: 2H Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal street and highway driving on dry, hard surfaced roads. STARTING AND OPERATING 339 4H Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range — This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only. NEUTRAL (N) Neutral — This range disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. 4L Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h). This transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2H position for normal street and highway conditions such as dry, hard surfaced roads. When additional traction is required, the 4H and 4L positions can be used to lock the front and rear driveshafts together and force the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished by simply moving the gear selector to the desired positions once the appropriate speed and gear requirements are met, refer to “Shifting Procedure – Manually Shifted Transfer Case” in this section for further information. The 4H and 4L positions are intended for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on dry, hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components. The “Transfer Case Position Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will alert the driver that the vehicle is in four-wheel drive and that the front and rear driveshafts are locked together. This light will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted into either the 4H or 4L position. There is no light for the 2H or NEUTRAL positions on some models. When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 2H or 4H positions at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h). Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel. Any difference will adversely affect shifting and can cause damage to the drivetrain. 5 340 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning, as this can cause damage to driveline components. Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit. NOTE: Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be experienced due to uneven tire wear, low or uneven tire pressures, excessive vehicle loading, or cold temperatures. WARNING! You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle. Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2H) Rear-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads. Four-Wheel Drive High Range (4H) Four-Wheel Drive High Range — This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Neutral (N) Neutral — This range disengages the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4L) Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h). CAUTION! Do not use 4L (Low) range when operating the vehicle on dry pavement. Driveline hardware damage can result. STARTING AND OPERATING 341 Shifting Procedure — Manually Shifted Transfer Case 2H To 4H Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the vehicle stopped or in motion. If the vehicle is in motion, shifts can be made up to 55 mph (88 km/h). With the vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after completing the shift. Apply a constant force when shifting the transfer case lever. 2H Or 4H To 4L NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4L some gear noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not detrimental to the vehicle or occupants. With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift the transmission into NEUTRAL. While the vehicle is coasting at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift the transfer case lever firmly to the desired position. Do not pause in transfer case NEUTRAL. NOTE: • Pausing in transfer case NEUTRAL in vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission may require shutting the engine OFF to avoid gear clash while completing the shift. If difficulty occurs, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL, hold your foot on the brake, and turn the engine OFF. Complete the range shift to the desired mode. • Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle completely stopped, however difficulty may occur due to the mating clutch teeth not being properly aligned. Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth alignment and shift completion to occur. The preferred method is with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h). Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L with the vehicle moving faster than 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h). • Do not attempt to shift into or out of 4L while the transmission is in gear. Transfer Case Position Indicator Light The “Transfer Case Position Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster is used to alert the driver that the front axle is fully engaged and all four wheels are driving. 5 342 STARTING AND OPERATING Electronically Shifted Transfer Case (Four-Position Switch) — If Equipped The electronic shift transfer case is operated by the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch), which is located on the instrument panel. • Neutral (NEUTRAL) For additional information on the appropriate use of each transfer case mode position, see the information below: 2WD Rear Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal street and highway driving on dry, hard surfaced roads. 4WD LOCK Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range — This range maximizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range provides additional traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only. 4WD LOW Four-Position/Part Time Transfer Case This electronically shifted transfer case provides four mode positions: • Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD) • Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range (4WD LOCK) • Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW) Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides low speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range provides additional traction and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h). STARTING AND OPERATING 343 NEUTRAL (N) Neutral — This range disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be driven in the two-wheel drive position (2WD) for normal street and highway conditions on dry, hard surfaced roads. When additional traction is required, the transfer case 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to maximize torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position. Refer to “Shifting Procedure” in this section for specific shifting instructions. The 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are designed for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline components. NOTE: The transfer case NEUTRAL button is located on the lower left hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch. The transfer case NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational towing only. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD and 4LOW) are located in the instrument cluster and indicate the current and desired transfer case selection. When you select a different transfer case position, the indicator lights will do the following: If All Of The Following Shift Conditions Are Met: 1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF. 2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift. 3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the selected position will stop flashing and remain ON. If One Or More Of The Following Shift Conditions Are Not Met: 1. The indicator light for the current position will remain ON. 2. The newly selected position indicator light will continue to flash. 5 344 STARTING AND OPERATING 3. The transfer case will not shift. NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer case position have been met. To retry the selection, turn the control switch back to the current position, wait five seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift requirements, refer to the ⬙Shifting Procedure⬙ for your transfer case, located in this section. The “SVC 4WD Warning Light” monitors the electronic shift four-wheel drive system. If this light remains on after engine start up or illuminates during driving, it means that the four-wheel drive system is not functioning properly and that service is required. When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD or 4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h). Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the drivetrain. Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit. WARNING! WARNING! Always engage the parking brake when powering down the vehicle if the “SVC 4WD Warning Light” is illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may allow the vehicle to roll, which may cause personal injury. NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the front or rear wheels are spinning, as this can cause damage to driveline components. You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle. STARTING AND OPERATING 345 Shifting Procedure NOTE: • If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case position have not been met, the transfer case will not shift. The position indicator light for the previous position will remain ON and the newly selected position indicator light will continue to flash until all the requirements for the selected position have been met. To retry a shift: return the control switch back to the original position, make certain all shift requirements have been met, wait five seconds and try the shift again. • If all the requirements to select a new transfer case position have been met, the current position indicator light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator light will flash until the transfer case completes the shift. When the shift is complete, the position indicator light for the selected position will stop flashing and remain ON. 2WD To 4WD LOCK Rotate the 4WD control switch to the desired position. Shifts between 2WD and 4WD LOCK can be done with the vehicle stopped or in motion. With the vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after turning the control switch. If the vehicle is stopped, the ignition switch must be in the ON position with the engine either running or off. This shift cannot be completed if the ignition switch is in the ACC position. NOTE: The four-wheel drive system will not allow shifts between 2WD/4WD LOCK if the front and/or rear wheels are spinning (no traction). In this situation, the selected position indicator light will flash and the original position indicator light will remain ON. At this time, reduce speed and stop spinning the wheels to complete the shift. 2WD Or 4WD LOCK To 4WD LOW NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some gear noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not detrimental to the vehicle or occupants. Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. You can use either of the following procedures: Preferred Procedure 1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h). 5 346 STARTING AND OPERATING 2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL. 3. While still rolling, rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired position. 4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not flashing), shift the transmission back into gear. Alternate Procedure 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop. 2. With the ignition switch in the ON position and the engine running, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL. 3. Rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired position. 4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not flashing), shift the transmission back into gear. NOTE: • If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift, then the desired position indicator light will flash continuously while the original position indicator light is ON, until all requirements have been met. • The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the ON position, the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing. LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL The limited-slip differential provides additional traction on snow, ice, mud, sand and gravel, particularly when there is a difference between the traction characteristics of the surface under the right and left rear wheels. During normal driving and cornering, the limited-slip unit performs similarly to a conventional differential. On slippery surfaces, however, the differential delivers more of the driving effort to the rear wheel having the better traction. The limited-slip differential is especially helpful during slippery driving conditions. With both rear wheels on a slippery surface, a slight application of the accelerator will supply maximum traction. When starting with only one rear wheel on an excessively slippery surface, slight momentary application of the parking brake may be necessary to gain maximum traction. STARTING AND OPERATING 347 WARNING! WARNING! On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip differential never run the engine with one rear wheel off the ground since the vehicle may drive through the rear wheel remaining on the ground. You could lose control of the vehicle. Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous. Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.). Care should be taken to avoid sudden accelerations when both rear wheels are on a slippery surface. This could cause both rear wheels to spin, and allow the vehicle to slide sideways on the crowned surface of a road or in a turn. DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear (driving) wheels. Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be observed: • Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy. • Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles. • Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become visible. • Keep tires properly inflated. 5 348 STARTING AND OPERATING • Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop. Your vehicle may be equipped with a Limited Slip Differential (LSD) that reduces, but does not eliminate, the amount of wheel slip across a given axle for improved handling. DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches/centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. Flowing/Rising Water WARNING! Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. Shallow Standing Water Although your vehicle is capable of driving through shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions and Warnings before doing so. WARNING! • Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through standing water. • Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes. • Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. STARTING AND OPERATING 349 CAUTION! • Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it. Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle. • Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water. • Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through standing water. This will minimize wave effects. • Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after driving through standing water. Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. • Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost. If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers. NOTE: • Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system. • Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This noise should be considered normal, and it does not in any way damage the steering system. 5 350 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! WARNING! Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible. Damage to the power steering pump may occur. Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended power steering fluid. Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required. The fluid should be checked at every oil change if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer. CAUTION! Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering system as the chemicals can damage your power steering components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking brake is fully applied, the engine is off and the key fob is removed from the ignition switch. Also, be certain to leave an automatic transmission in PARK, or manual transmission in REVERSE or first gear. The foot operated parking brake is located below the lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the parking brake, firmly push the parking brake pedal fully. To release the parking brake, pull the parking brake release handle. STARTING AND OPERATING 351 When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake before placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK. The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle. WARNING! Parking Brake Release When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument cluster will illuminate. NOTE: • When the parking brake is applied and the automatic transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle. • This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application. • Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector. • Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. (Continued) 5 352 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! (Continued) • Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and a collision. • Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury. Also, be certain to leave an automatic transmission in PARK, a manual transmission in REVERSE or first gear. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury. CAUTION! If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately. BRAKE SYSTEM If power assist is lost for any reason (for example, repeated brake applications with the engine off), the brakes will still function. However, you will experience a substantial increase in braking effort to stop the vehicle. If either the front or rear hydraulic system loses normal braking capability, the remaining system will still function with some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be evident by increased pedal travel during application, greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and activation of the “Brake Warning Light” and the “ABS Warning Light” (if equipped) during brake use. The brake system power assist is provided by a hydro-boost unit which shares fluid with the power steering system. You may experience some clicking or hissing noises from the hydro-boost system during hard braking conditions. NOTE: Under cold temperatures, pedal effort will be higher than normal until the power steering fluid reaches operating temperature. Hydraulic Brake Assist The brake system power assist is provided by a hydro-boost unit which shares fluid with the power steering system. You may experience some clicking or hissing noises from the hydro-boost system during hard braking conditions. NOTE: Under cold temperatures, pedal effort will be higher than normal until the power steering fluid reaches operating temperature. STARTING AND OPERATING 353 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic Stability Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions. Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer Sway Control (TSC) and Hill Descent Control (HDC). Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) This function manages the distribution of the braking torque between the front and rear axles by limiting braking pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before the front axle. Brake System Warning Light The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds. If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or comes on while driving, it indicates that the brake system is not functioning properly and that immediate service is required. If the “Brake System Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the light repaired as soon as possible. Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions. The system automatically prevents wheel lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking. The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises. ABS is activated during braking when the system detects one or more wheels begins to lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activation(s). You also may experience the following when ABS activates: • The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a short time after the stop). 5 354 STARTING AND OPERATING • The clicking sound of solenoid valves. WARNING! (Continued) • Brake pedal pulsations. • A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop. These are all normal characteristics of ABS. WARNING! • The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals. • Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop. • The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. (Continued) • The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. • The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modification may result in degraded ABS performance. Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake System Warning Light” is not on. STARTING AND OPERATING 355 If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the light repaired as soon as possible. Brake Assist System (BAS) The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated. WARNING! The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. Hill Start Assist (HSA) The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver does not apply the throttle before this time expires, the system will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill as normal. The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to activate: • The feature must be enabled. • The vehicle must be stopped. 5 356 STARTING AND OPERATING • Park brake must be off. WARNING! (Continued) • Driver door must be closed. • The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade. • The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear). • HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward gears. The system will not activate if the transmission is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA will remain active. all road conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision or serious personal injury. Towing With HSA HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back while towing a trailer. WARNING! There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur, such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be attentive to distance to other vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly brake operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle under • If you use a trailer brake controller with your trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there may not be enough brake pressure to hold both the vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake pedal is released. In order to avoid rolling down an incline while resuming acceleration, manually activate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal. • HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK. (Continued) (Continued) WARNING! STARTING AND OPERATING 357 WARNING! (Continued) • Failure to follow these warnings may cause the vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide with another vehicle, object or person, and cause serious or fatal injury. Always remember to use the parking brake while parking on a hill and that the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle. Disabling And Enabling HSA This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, proceed as follows: • For vehicles equipped with the instrument cluster display, refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. • If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. For vehicles not equipped with the instrument cluster display, perform the following steps: 1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing straight forward). 2. Shift the transmission into PARK. 3. Apply the parking brake. 4. Start the engine. 5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than one-half turn to the left. 6. Push the “ESC Off” button located in the lower switch bank below the climate control four times within twenty seconds. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” should turn on and turn off two times. 7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an additional slightly more than one-half turn to the right. 8. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then back to the ON position. If the sequence was completed properly, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will blink several times to confirm HSA is disabled. 9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting. 5 358 STARTING AND OPERATING Traction Control System (TCS) This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if TCS and ESC are in a reduced mode. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path. ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. • Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position. • Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” located in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions. WARNING! • Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 359 WARNING! (Continued) turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. • Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain your vehicle, may change the handling characteristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the steering system, suspension, braking system, tire type and size or wheel size may adversely affect ESC performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death. ESC Operating Modes NOTE: Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ESC system may have multiple operating modes. ESC On This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this mode. This mode should be used for most driving conditions. Alternate ESC modes should only be used for specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs. Partial Off The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a more spirited driving experience is desired. This mode may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation, which allows for more wheel spin than normally allowed. This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck. To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will turn off. 5 360 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE: For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes a momentary button push will toggle the ESC mode. Multiple momentary button pushed may be required to return to ESC On. NOTE: • When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine power reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced. • Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode. Full Off – If Equipped This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only and should not be used on any public roadways. In this mode, TCS and ESC features are turned OFF. To enter the “Full Off” mode, push and hold the “ESC Off” switch for five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the engine running. After five seconds, a chime will sound, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will illuminate, and the “ESC OFF” message will display in the instrument cluster. To turn ESC on again, momentarily push the “ESC Off” switch. NOTE: System may switch from ESC “Full Off” to “Partial Off” mode when vehicle exceeds a predetermined speed. When the vehicle speed slows below the predetermined speed the system will return to ESC “Full Off”. ESC modes may also be affected by drive modes (if equipped). WARNING! • In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque reduction and stability features are disabled. Therefore, enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not engage to assist in maintaining stability. ESC “Full Off” mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use only. • With the ESC switched off, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not engage to assist in maintaining stability. ESC “Full Off” mode is only intended for off-highway or off-road use. (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 361 WARNING! (Continued) • The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent collisions. ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and ESC OFF Indicator Light The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position. It should go out with the engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions. NOTE: • The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON. • Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously. • The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation. The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the customer has elected to have the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) in a reduced mode. 5 362 STARTING AND OPERATING Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) WARNING! (Continued) This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles. NOTE: ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off” mode (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this section for a complete explanation of the available ESC modes. WARNING! Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions and driving conditions, influence the chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those that involve (Continued) leaving the roadway or striking objects or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others. Trailer Sway Control (TSC) — If Equipped TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized. NOTE: TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer to “Trailer Towing” in this section for further information. When TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/ Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes. STARTING AND OPERATING 363 WARNING! If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway. Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped HDC is intended for low speed off road driving while in 4WD Low Range. HDC maintains vehicle speed while descending hills during various driving situations. HDC controls vehicle speed by actively controlling the brakes. HDC has three states: 1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate). • Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h). • Parking brake is released. • Driver door is closed. Activating HDC Once HDC is enabled, it will activate automatically if driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude. The set speed for HDC is selectable by the driver, and can be adjusted by using the gear shift +/-. The following summarizes the HDC set speeds: HDC Target Set Speeds • P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but will not activate 2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding with brake or throttle application). • R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h) 3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling vehicle speed). • D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h) Enabling HDC HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but the following conditions must also be met to enable HDC: • Driveline is in 4WD Low Range • N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h) • 1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h) • 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h) • 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h) • 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h) 5 364 STARTING AND OPERATING • 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h) • 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h) • 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h) • 8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h) • 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped • Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains below 40 mph (64 km/h). • Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient magnitude, is on level ground, or is on an uphill grade. • Vehicle is shifted to park. Disabling HDC NOTE: During HDC, the +/- shifter input is used for HDC target speed selection but will not affect the gear chosen by the transmission. When actively controlling HDC, the transmission will shift appropriately for the driver-selected set speed and corresponding driving conditions. HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the following conditions occur: Driver Override • The parking brake is applied. The driver may override HDC activation with throttle or brake application at anytime. • Driver door opens. Deactivating HDC HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of the following conditions occur: • Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or brake application. • The driver pushes the HDC switch. • The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low Range. • The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds. • The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h) (HDC exits immediately). • HDC detects excessive brake temperature. STARTING AND OPERATING 365 Feedback To The Driver TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the HDC switch has an LED which offer feedback to the driver about the state HDC is in. Tire Markings • The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and remain on solid when HDC is enabled or activated. This is the normal operating condition for HDC. 5 • The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several seconds then extinguish when the driver pushes the HDC switch but enable conditions are not met. • The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several seconds then extinguish when HDC disables due to excess speed. • The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash when HDC deactivates due to overheated brakes. The flashing will stop and HDC will activate again once the brakes have cooled sufficiently. WARNING! HDC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver must remain attentive to the driving conditions and is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed. 1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN) 2 — Size Designation 3 — Service Description 4 — Maximum Load 5 — Maximum Pressure 6 — Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades 366 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE: • P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H. • European — Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H. • LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16. • Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M. • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT. STARTING AND OPERATING 367 Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE: Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or T or S = Temporary spare tire or 31 = Overall diameter in inches (in) 215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm) 65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%) – Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or 10.5 = Section width in inches (in) R = Construction code – ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or – ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction 15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in) 5 368 STARTING AND OPERATING EXAMPLE: Service Description: 95 = Load Index – A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H = Speed Symbol – A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions – The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits) Load Identification: Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire: • XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or • LL = Light load tire or • C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire STARTING AND OPERATING 369 Tire Identification Number (TIN) The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire. EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT = Department of Transportation – This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits) L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits) ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits) 03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) – 03 means the 3rd week 01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) – 01 means the year 2001 – Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 5 370 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Terminology And Definitions Term B-Pillar Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Maximum Inflation Pressure Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Tire Placard Definition The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals). The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall. Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard. A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures. STARTING AND OPERATING 371 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard Location NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side door. Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including the spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and inflate to the recommended pressure for your vehicle. 5 Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar) WARNING! Example Tire Placard Location (Door) • Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them. • Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions. Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure. (Continued) 372 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! (Continued) Tire And Loading Information Placard Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and chuck holes can cause damage that results in tire failure. Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle. Over-inflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control. Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure. Tire And Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the: 1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle. 2. Total weight your vehicle can carry. 3. Tire size designed for your vehicle. 4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and spare tires. STARTING AND OPERATING 373 Loading Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit— The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in “Starting And Operating”, or the Tire Information Supplement, located in your Owner’s Information kit. (1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard. NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded. Refer to “Vehicle Loading” in “Starting And Operating”, or the Tire Information Supplement located in your Owner’s Information kit, for further information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing. (4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.) To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced here. (2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. (3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs. (5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. (6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. 5 374 STARTING AND OPERATING Metric Example For Load Limit For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg, and there will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4. NOTE: • If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle. • For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg). STARTING AND OPERATING 375 5 WARNING! Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them. 376 STARTING AND OPERATING TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION WARNING! (Continued) Tire Pressure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure: • Safety and Vehicle Stability • Economy • Tread Wear • Ride Comfort • Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control. • Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle. • Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left. • Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure. Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering. Safety WARNING! NOTE: • Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions. • Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result in overheating and tire failure. • Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure. (Continued) • Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic and unpredictable steering response. • Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right. Fuel Economy Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption. STARTING AND OPERATING 377 Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride. Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door. At least once a month: • Check and adjust tire pressure with pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not judgement when determining proper may look properly inflated even when inflated. a good quality make a visual inflation. Tires they are under- • Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage. CAUTION! After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the valve stem. Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with temperature changes. Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the Winter. Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature condition. Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low. 5 378 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. WARNING! High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail. You could have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h). Tire Maintenance And Replacement You should follow all maintenance procedures specified by the manufacturer of this vehicle’s tires. The tires originally installed on this vehicle were designed to conform to EPA greenhouse gas standards and NHTSA fuel economy standards. If you need to replace your tires, you should do so with tires that meet those standards. Check with your authorized dealer or with the tire manufacturer for appropriate replacement tires. Radial Ply Tires WARNING! Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never combine them with other types of tires. Tire Repair If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it meets the following criteria: • The tire has not been driven on when flat. • The damage is only on the tread section of your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable). • The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm). Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and additional information. STARTING AND OPERATING 379 Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol). Summer tires do not contain the all season mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire Summer tires only in sets of four; failure adversely affect the safety and handling of Tire Types All Season Tires — If Equipped All season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring, Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an authorized dealer. designation or sidewall. Use to do so may your vehicle. WARNING! Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates the possibility of loss of vehicle control. Snow Tires Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall. If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle. Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). 5 380 STARTING AND OPERATING For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h), refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be checked before using these tire types. Run Flat Tires — If Equipped Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat mode, it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable. It is not recommended to drive a vehicle loaded at full capacity, or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the Run Flat mode. See the tire pressure monitoring section for more information. Spare Tires — If Equipped NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead of a spare tire, please refer to the “Tire Service Kit” section located in your Owner’s Information kit for further information. CAUTION! Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact or limited use temporary spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may result. Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel — If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent in look and function to the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern. STARTING AND OPERATING 381 Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M. WARNING! Compact and Collapsible spares are for temporary emergency use only. With these spares, do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control. T, S = Temporary Spare Tire Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity. Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time. Full Size Spare — If Equipped The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity. 5 382 STARTING AND OPERATING Limited Use Spare — If Equipped Tire Spinning The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the limited use spare wheel. This label contains the driving limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity. When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping. WARNING! Limited use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the speed listed on the limit use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control. Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. WARNING! Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. STARTING AND OPERATING 383 Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced. These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for further information. Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including, but not limited to: • Driving style. • Tire pressure – Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement. Tire Tread 1 — Worn Tire 2 — New Tire • Distance driven. • Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance schedule is highly recommended. 5 384 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline. Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on “Tread Wear Indicator” in this section. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire Safety Information” section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire. It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match those of the original wheels. It is recommended you contact your authorized tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. STARTING AND OPERATING 385 WARNING! CAUTION! • Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle. • Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity, other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose control and have a collision. • Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control. Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings. TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard against damage. • Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as recommended by the traction device manufacturer. 5 386 STARTING AND OPERATING Please follow the table below for proper tire size, chain type, and axle recommendations: Vehicle Chassis Cab 3500 (Single Rear Wheel) Models Chassis Cab 3500 (Dual Rear Wheel) 4X2 Models Chassis Cab 3500 (Dual Rear Wheel) 4X4 Models Chassis Cab 4500/5500 Models Axle Recommendations Rear Only Rear Only Front/Rear Rear Only Tire Sizes Chain Class LT265/70R18E LT235/80R17E LT235/80R17E 225/70R19.5G U U U U Class Class Class Class WARNING! CAUTION! (Continued) Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow) between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable handling. You could lose control and have a collision. To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the following precautions: • Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the device before further use. • Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km). • Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). • Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle. (Continued) (Continued) CAUTION! STARTING AND OPERATING 387 CAUTION! (Continued) • Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement. • Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating speed, and conditions for use. Always use the suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h). • Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed. 5 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering, driving, and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal rates. These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off Road type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride. Tire Rotation NOTE: On Canadian vehicles only, if your vehicle is equipped with All-Season type tires on the front and On/Off Road type tires mounted on the rear, do not use a front to back rotation pattern. Instead, rotate your tires side to side at the recommended intervals. 388 STARTING AND OPERATING them from the outer rear wheels, because of this, the inner and outer wheel locations can’t be switched. Dual Rear Wheels • After a tire rotation is completed, as shown below, the system can auto learn the locations of each sensor ID. Auto learning/localization occurs when the vehicle ignition status is changed from Off to On and speeds of greater than 5 mph (8km/h) are obtained and remain over 5mph (8km/h) for at about a 15 minute period. You may need to drive for 20 minutes to account slower speeds and stops. Tire Rotation The tires used on dual wheel assemblies should be matched for wear to prevent overloading one tire in a set. To check if tires are even, lay a straight edge across all four tires. The straight edge should touch all the tires. NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS): • The Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS) uses unique sensors in the inner rear wheels to help identify • If the tires are rotated incorrectly, the Auto localization of the TPIS sensors will fail to locate correctly resulting in incorrect locations for the pressure values displayed in the Instrument Cluster. CAUTION! • 4500/5500 Dual Rear Tires may only have one approved direction of rotation. This is to accommodate the asymmetrical design (tread pattern) of the On/ Off road tire. (Continued) STARTING AND OPERATING 389 CAUTION! (Continued) • When replacing a flat, the spare tire may have to be remounted on the rim or installed at a different location to maintain the correct placement of the tire on the wheel relative to the tire/wheel position on the vehicle. For example, if the spare is used to replace an outer rear tire it will have to be remounted on the rim so that the wheel is dished inward. That way the tread design of asymmetrical tires will maintain proper position. Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate. Traction Grades DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle. All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades. The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. WARNING! The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics. 5 390 STARTING AND OPERATING Temperature Grades TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel, than the minimum required by law. The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure. WARNING! The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure. The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Operating” for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure. The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for any reason, including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire. STARTING AND OPERATING 391 The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to turn off. The system will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will still be ON. In this situation, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value. CAUTION! • The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. • Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your sensor function checked. • After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could damage the TPMS sensor. 5 392 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE: Base System — If Equipped • The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition. The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module. • The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure. • Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure. • The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.” • Four TPM sensors • Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire. The TPMS consists of the following components: • Receiver module • TPM Telltale Light The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if equipped) has a TPM sensor. The matching full size spare can be used in place of any of the four road tires. The TPMS will only monitor the pressure in the full size spare when it is used in place of a road tire. Otherwise, a spare with a pressure below the low-pressure limit will not cause the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to illuminate or the chime to sound. STARTING AND OPERATING 393 Premium System The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module. showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values in a different color. An ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will also be displayed. NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure. 5 The TPMS consists of the following components: • Receiver module • Four TPM sensors • Various TPMS messages, which display in the instrument cluster • TPM Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires. In addition, the instrument cluster will display a “LOW TIRE” message and a graphic “LOW TIRE PRESSURE” Message Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition (those in a different color in the instrument cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure inflation value as shown in the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update, the graphic display in the instrument cluster will return to it’s original color, and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off. The 394 STARTING AND OPERATING vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. Service TPMS Warning If a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the instrument cluster will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received. If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will no longer flash, and the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no longer display, and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the following: • Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors. • Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals. • Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings. • Using tire chains on the vehicle. • Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors. Vehicles With Non Matching Full Size Spare Or Compact Spare Tire Pressure Monitor Display • The non matching full size spare or compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the non matching full size spare or compact spare tire. STARTING AND OPERATING 395 • If you install the non matching full size spare or compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the TPM Telltale Light and a “LOW TIRE” message will remain ON and a chime will sound. In addition, the graphic in the instrument cluster will still display a pressure value in a different color. • For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound, the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the instrument cluster will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value. • Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the non matching full size spare or compact spare, the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the instrument cluster will display a new pressure value instead of dashes (- -). The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information. Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS) Chassis Cab — If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS). The Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS) uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to transmit tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver module. NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure. The TPIS consists of the following components: • Receiver module • Four TPM sensors (Single Rear Wheel [SRW] applications) • Six TPM sensors (Dual Rear Wheel [DRW] applications) • Pressure display in the instrument cluster display. 5 396 STARTING AND OPERATING The TPIS system will display all four (Single Rear Wheel [SRW] applications) or six (Dual Rear Wheel [DRW] applications) tire pressure values in the instrument cluster display. If a system fault is detected, the instrument cluster will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received. If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no longer be displayed, and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the following: • Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM sensors. • Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals. • Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings. • Using tire chains on the vehicle. • Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors. General Information The following regulatory statement applies to all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. STARTING AND OPERATING 397 FUEL REQUIREMENTS Reformulated Gasoline 6.4L Engine Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality. This engines is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfactory fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded gasoline having a posted octane number range of 87 to 89 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of 89 octane “Plus” gasoline is recommended for optimum performance and fuel economy. While operating on gasoline with an octane number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle. The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved performance and durability of engine and fuel system components. Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as ethanol. CAUTION! DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 15% ethanol (E-15). 5 398 STARTING AND OPERATING Problems that result from using gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Modifications that allow the engine to run on compressed natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane (LP) may result in damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system components. Problems that result from running CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and many void or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms: • Operate in a lean mode. • OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on. • Poor engine performance. • Poor cold start and cold drivability. • Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion. CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications Modifications that allow the engine to run on compressed natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane (LP) may result in damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel system components. Problems that result from running CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. MMT In Gasoline Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump, therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline. STARTING AND OPERATING 399 Materials Added To Fuel Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion, and stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines that have these additives will help improve fuel economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle performance. Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline contains a higher level of detergents to further aide in minimizing engine and fuel system deposits. When available, the usage of Top Tier Detergent gasoline is recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers. Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum and varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials. Fuel System Cautions CAUTION! Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s performance: • The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system. • An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance. • The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. 5 400 STARTING AND OPERATING NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you. Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING! Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning: • Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running for more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle. • Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side windows fully open. ADDING FUEL CAUTION! • Damage to the fuel system or emissions control system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap (fuel filler cap). A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system. Also, a poorly-fitted aftermarket cap can cause the MIL (Malfunction Indicator Light) to illuminate due to fuel vapors escaping from the system. • A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the MIL to turn on. • To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top off” the fuel tank after filling. NOTE: When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full. STARTING AND OPERATING 401 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message WARNING! • Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is being filled. • Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is running. This is in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the MIL to turn on. NOTE: Tighten the gas cap ¼ turn until you hear one click. This is an indication that the cap is properly tightened. If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the Malfunction Indicator Light will come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle is refueled. WARNING! A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be burned. Always place gas containers on the ground while filling. (Continued) If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator will display in the instrument cluster telltale display area. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and push the RIGHT button to turn off the message. If the problem continues, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started. VEHICLE LOADING Certification Label As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar. This label contains the month and year of manufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the bottom of the label is your VIN. 5 402 STARTING AND OPERATING Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) Tire Size The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo. The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded. The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size. Payload The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the driver, all passengers, options and cargo. Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded. Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle, springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension components sometimes specified by purchasers for increased durability does not necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR. Rim Size This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed. Inflation Pressure This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR. Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added. STARTING AND OPERATING 403 Loading The actual total weight and the weight of the front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation. The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should then be determined separately to be sure that the load is properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving. Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate. CAUTION! Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle. TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible. To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage, follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing. 5 404 STARTING AND OPERATING Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) WARNING! If the gross trailer weight is 5,000 lbs (2,267 kg) or more, it is recommended to use a weight-distributing hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle. If you use a standard weight-carrying hitch, you could lose control of your vehicle and cause a collision. The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and ready for operation⬙ condition. The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale. The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination. WARNING! It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded. STARTING AND OPERATING 405 Tongue Weight (TW) Weight-Distributing Hitch The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle. A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent steering and brake control, thereby enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle and trailer configuration/loading to comply with GAWR requirements. Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer. Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling. Weight-Carrying Hitch A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the truck. These kind of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small- and medium-sized trailers. 5 406 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! • An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch system may reduce handling, stability and braking performance and could result in a collision. • Weight distributing systems may not be compatible with surge brake couplers. Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information. With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct) Without Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect) STARTING AND OPERATING 407 Fifth-Wheel Hitch The fifth-wheel hitch is a special high platform with a coupling that mounts over the rear axle of the tow vehicle in the truck bed. It connects a vehicle and fifth-wheel trailer with a coupling king pin. Your truck may be equipped with a 5th wheel hitch option. Refer to the separately provided 5th wheel hitch safety, care, assembly, and operating instructions. Gooseneck Hitch Improper Adjustment Of Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect) The gooseneck hitch employs a pivoted coupling arm which attaches to a ball mounted in the bed of a pickup truck. The coupling arm connects to the hitch mounted over the rear axle in the truck bed. 5 408 STARTING AND OPERATING Trailer Hitch Classification The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition. Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg) II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg) III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2,267 kg) IV - Extra Heavy 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg) Class Class Class Class Duty Fifth Wheel/Gooseneck Greater than 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg) Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain. All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle. Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) NOTE: For additional trailer towing information (maximum trailer weight ratings) refer to the following website addresses: • ramtrucks.com/en/towing_guide/ • ramtruck.ca (Canada) • rambodybuilder.com Trailer And Tongue Weight Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your trailer hitch or the weights specified in the information that can be found under “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)”. Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle: • The tongue weight of the trailer • The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle • The weight of the driver and all passengers STARTING AND OPERATING 409 NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional factoryinstalled options or dealer-installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle. NOTE: Refer to “Tire Safety Information/Tire and Loading Information Placard” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. Towing Requirements To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended: CAUTION! • Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle or other parts could be damaged. • Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads. WARNING! Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible: • Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel. When trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control. You could lose control of your vehicle and have a collision. • When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure or tires. • Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners. • Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in (Continued) 5 410 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING! (Continued) PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL (N). Always block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels. • GCWR must not be exceeded. • Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded: 1. GVWR 2. GTW 3. GAWR 4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized. Towing Requirements — Tires • Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire. • Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Operating” for proper tire inflation procedures. • Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage. • Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Operating” for the proper inspection procedure. • When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Operating” for proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits. Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes WARNING! • Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident. • Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident. STARTING AND OPERATING 411 CAUTION! If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg) loaded, it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances. • Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury. Integrated Trailer Brake Module — If Equipped Your vehicle may have an Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM) for Electric and Electric Over Hydraulic (EOH) trailer brakes. NOTE: This module has been designed and verified with electric trailer brakes and new electric over hydraulic systems. Some previous EOH systems may not be compatible with ITBM. • An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic brake controller is not required. • Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 1,653 lbs (749 kg). Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM) 1 — GAIN Adjustment Button 2 — GAIN Adjustment Button 3 — Manual Brake Control Lever 5 412 STARTING AND OPERATING The user interface consists of the following: GAIN Adjustment Buttons (+/-) Manual Brake Control Lever Pushing these buttons will adjust the brake control power output to the trailer brakes in 0.5 increments. The GAIN setting can be increased to a maximum of 10 or decreased to a minimum of 0 (no trailer braking). Slide the manual brake control lever to the right to activate power to the trailer’s electric brakes independent of the tow vehicle’s brakes. If the manual brake control lever is activated while the brake is also applied, the greater of the two inputs determines the power sent to the trailer brakes. The trailer and the vehicle’s brake lamps will come on when either vehicle braking or manual trailer brakes are applied. Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light This light indicates the trailer electrical connection status. If no electrical connection is detected after the ignition is turned on, pushing the GAIN adjustment button or sliding the manual brake control lever will display the GAIN setting for 10 seconds and the “Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light” will not be displayed. If a fault is detected in the trailer wiring or the Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM), the “Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light” will flash. GAIN The GAIN setting is used to set the trailer brake control for the specific towing condition and should be changed as towing conditions change. Changes to towing conditions include trailer load, vehicle load, road conditions and weather. Adjusting GAIN NOTE: This should only be performed in a traffic free environment at speeds of approximately 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h). 1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good working condition, functioning normally and properly adjusted. See your trailer dealer if necessary. 2. Hook up the trailer and make the electrical connections according to the trailer manufacturer’s instructions. STARTING AND OPERATING 413 3. When a trailer with electric/EOH brakes is plugged in, the trailer connected message should appear in the instrument cluster display (if the connection is not recognized by the ITBM, braking functions will not be available), the GAIN setting will illuminate and the correct type of trailer must be selected from the instrument cluster display options. 4. Push the UP or DOWN button on the steering wheel until “TRAILER TOW” appears on the screen. 5. Push the RIGHT arrow on the steering wheel to enter “TRAILER TOW”. 6. Push the UP or DOWN buttons until Trailer Brake Type appears on the screen. 7. Push the RIGHT arrow and then push the UP or DOWN buttons until the proper Trailer Brake Type appears on the screen. 8. In a traffic-free environment, tow the trailer on a dry, level surface at a speed of 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h) and squeeze the manual brake control lever completely. 9. If the trailer wheels lockup (indicated by squealing tires), reduce the GAIN setting; if the trailer wheels turn freely, increase the GAIN setting. Repeat steps 8 and 9 until the GAIN setting is at a point just below trailer wheel lockup. If towing a heavier trailer, trailer wheel lockup may not be attainable even with the maximum GAIN setting of 10. Type of Trailer Brakes Light Electric Electric Trailer Brakes Heavy Electric Electric Trailer Brakes Load *Under 10,000 lbs *Above 10,000 lbs * The suggested selection depends and may change depending on the customer preferences for braking performance. Condition of the trailer brakes, driving and road state may also affect the selection. Light EOH Electric over Hydraulic Trailer Brakes *Under 10,000 lbs Heavy EOH Electric over Hydraulic Trailer Brakes *Above 10,000 lbs 5 414 STARTING AND OPERATING Instrument Cluster Display Messages NOTE: The trailer brake control interacts with the instrument cluster display. Display messages, along with a single chime, will be displayed when a malfunction is determined in the trailer connection, trailer brake control, or on the trailer. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. • An aftermarket controller may be available for use with trailers with air or electric-over-hydraulic trailer brake systems. To determine the type of brakes on your trailer and the availability of controllers, check with your trailer manufacturer or dealer. CAUTION! Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the ITBM system may result in reduced or complete loss of trailer braking. There may be a increase in stopping distance or trailer instability which could result in damage to your vehicle, trailer, or other property. WARNING! Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the ITBM system may result in reduced or complete loss of trailer braking. There may be a increase in stopping distance or trailer instability which could result in personal injury. • Removal of the ITBM will cause errors and it may cause damage to the electrical system and electronic modules of the vehicle. See your authorized dealer if an aftermarket module is to be installed. Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size, stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety. NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring harness. WARNING! Any work done to the vehicle’s electrical system or wiring should be performed by a qualified automotive technician. If done improperly it may cause damage to the electrical system wiring and could result in serious or fatal injury. STARTING AND OPERATING 415 Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping and backing the trailer up in an area away from heavy traffic. Automatic Transmission — If Equipped The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, select TOW/HAUL mode or select a lower gear range (using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control). NOTE: Using TOW/HAUL mode, or selecting a lower gear range (using the ERS shift control) while operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also provide better engine braking. When towing a loaded trailer up steep grades at low speeds (20 mph [32 km/h] or below), holding your vehicle in first gear (using the ERS shift control) can help to avoid transmission overheating. If you regularly tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation, then change the transmission fluid and filter(s) as specified for ⬙police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.⬙ Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level before towing. Tow/Haul Mode To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheating, activate TOW/HAUL mode when driving in hilly areas, or select a lower gear range (using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control) on more severe grades. Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped • Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads. • When using the speed control, if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until you can get back to cruising speed. • Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency. 5 416 STARTING AND OPERATING Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions: unique electrical systems that must be connected to properly assure operator safety and prevent overloading vehicle systems. City Driving When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed. Highway Driving Reduce speed. WARNING! Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could adversely affect performance of the airbag system in a collision. Do not expect that the airbag will perform as described earlier in this manual. Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily. SNOWPLOW CAUTION! The “Lamp Out” indicator could illuminate if exterior lamps are not properly installed. Snowplow Prep Packages are available as a factory installed option. These packages include components necessary to equip your vehicle with a snowplow. Before Plowing NOTE: Before installation of a snowplow it is highly recommended that the owner/installer obtain and follow the recommendations contained within the current Ram Body Builders Guide. See your authorized dealer, installer or snowplow manufacturer for this information. There are • Check the runners and cutting edge for excessive wear. The cutting edge should be ¼ to ½ in (6 cm to 1.2 cm) above ground in snow plowing position. • Check the hydraulic system for leaks and proper fluid level. • Check the mounting bolts and nuts for proper tightness. • Check that snowplow lighting is connected and functioning properly. STARTING AND OPERATING 417 Snowplow Prep Package Model Availability For Information about snowplow applications visit www.ramtrucks.com or refer to the current Ram Body Builders Guide. 1. The maximum number of occupants in the truck should not exceed two. 2. The total GVWR or the Front GAWR or the Rear GAWR should never be exceeded. 3. Cargo capacity will be reduced by the addition of options or passengers, etc. The loaded vehicle weight, including the snowplow system, all aftermarket accessories, driver, passengers, options, and cargo, must not exceed either the Gross Vehicle Weight (GVWR) or Gross Axle Weight (GAWR) ratings. These weights are specified on the Safety Compliance Certification Label on the driver’s side door opening. NOTE: Detach the snowplow when transporting passengers. Vehicle front end wheel alignment was set to specifications at the factory without consideration for the weight of the plow. Front end toe-in should be checked and reset if necessary at the beginning and end of the snowplow season. This will help prevent uneven tire wear. The blade should be lowered whenever the vehicle is parked. Maintain and operate your vehicle and snowplow equipment following the recommendations provided by the specific snowplow manufacturer. Over The Road Operation With Snowplow Attached The blade restricts air flow to the radiator and causes the engine to operate at higher than normal temperatures. Therefore, when transporting the plow, angle the blade completely and position it as low as road or surface conditions permit. Do not exceed 40 mph (64 km/h). The operator should always maintain a safe stopping distance and allow adequate passing clearance. 5 418 STARTING AND OPERATING Operating Tips Under ideal snow plowing conditions, 20 mph (32 km/h) should be maximum operating speed. The operator should be familiar with the area and surface to be cleaned. Reduce speed and use extreme caution when plowing unfamiliar areas or under poor visibility. General Maintenance Snowplows should be maintained in accordance with the plow manufacturer’s instructions. Keep all snowplow electrical connections and battery terminals clean and free of corrosion. When plowing snow, to avoid transmission and drivetrain damage, the following precautions should be observed. • Operate with transfer case in 4LO when plowing small or congested areas where speeds are not likely to exceed 15 mph (24 km/h). At higher speeds operate in 4HI. • Vehicles with automatic transmissions should use 4LO range when plowing deep or heavy snow for extended periods of time to avoid transmission overheating. • Do not shift the transmission unless the engine has returned to idle and wheels have stopped. Make a practice of stepping on the brake pedal while shifting the transmission. STARTING AND OPERATING 419 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Towing Condition Flat Tow Dolly Tow Wheels OFF The Ground NONE Front Two-Wheel Drive Models NOT ALLOWED Four-Wheel Drive Models See Instructions • Automatic transmission in PARK • Manual transmission in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL) • Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N) • Tow in forward direction NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED Rear OK NOT ALLOWED On Trailer ALL OK OK NOTE: When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details. 5 420 STARTING AND OPERATING Recreational Towing — Two-Wheel Drive Models DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain will result. Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground. This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure: 1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following the dolly manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly. 3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place automatic transmission in PARK, manual transmission in gear (not in NEUTRAL). 4. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly, following the dolly manufacturer’s instructions. 5. Turn the ignition OFF and remove the key fob. 6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for towing, to secure the front wheels in the straight position. CAUTION! • Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. • Do not disconnect the driveshaft because fluid may leak from the transmission, causing damage to internal parts. Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive Models NOTE: Both the manual shift and electronic shift transfer cases must be shifted into NEUTRAL (N) for recreational towing. Automatic transmissions must be shifted into PARK for recreational towing. Manual transmissions must be placed in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL) for recreational towing. Refer to the following for the proper transfer case NEUTRAL (N) shifting procedure for your vehicle. STARTING AND OPERATING 421 CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued) • DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing with only one set of wheels on the ground (front or rear) will cause severe transmission and/or transfer case damage. Tow with all four wheels either ON the ground, or OFF the ground (using a vehicle trailer). • Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the transfer case. • Before recreational towing, the transfer case must be in NEUTRAL. To be certain the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL, perform the procedure outlined under “Shifting Into NEUTRAL”. Internal transmission damage will result, if the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL during towing. • Automatic transmissions must be placed in PARK, and manual transmissions must be placed in gear (not in Neutral) for recreational towing. • Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. • Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because fluid will leak from the transfer case, causing damage to internal parts. • Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be damaged. (Continued) Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N) Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for recreational towing. WARNING! You or others could be injured or killed if you leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N) position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain, and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the automatic transmission is in PARK (or manual transmission is in gear). The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle. 5 422 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION! It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N) before recreational towing to prevent damage to internal parts. will stop blinking (stay on solid) when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is complete. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL (N) light stays on, release the NEUTRAL (N) button. 6. Release the parking brake. 7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE. 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, with the engine running. Firmly apply the parking brake. 2. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. 3. Press and hold the brake pedal. 4. Depress the clutch pedal on a manual transmission. 5. Shift the transfer case into NEUTRAL: • With manual shift transfer case, shift the transfer case lever into NEUTRAL (N). • With electronic shift transfer case, push and hold the transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button. Some models have a small, recessed ⬙N⬙ button (at the center of the transfer case switches) that must be pressed using a ballpoint pen or similar object. Other models have a rectangular NEUTRAL switch, below the rotary transfer case control knob. The NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will blink while the shift is in progress. The light 8. Release the brake pedal (and clutch pedal on manual transmissions) for five seconds and ensure that there is no vehicle movement. 9. Repeat steps seven and eight with automatic transmission in DRIVE or manual transmission in first gear. 10. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. Firmly apply the parking brake. Turn OFF the engine. For vehicles with Keyless Enter-N-Go, push and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button until the engine shuts off. 11. Shift the transmission into PARK or place manual transmission in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL). 12. Place the ignition in the OFF mode, and remove the key fob. 13. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable tow bar. STARTING AND OPERATING 423 14. Release the parking brake. 2. Firmly apply the parking brake. NOTE: With electronic shift transfer case: 3. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN mode, but do not start the engine. • Steps 2 through 4 are requirements that must be met before pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must continue to be met until the shift has been completed. If any of these requirements are not met before pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL (N) button is released. • The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition is not in the ON/RUN mode, the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing. • A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met. Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N) Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for normal usage. 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it connected to the tow vehicle. 4. Press and hold the brake pedal. 5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL. • With manual shift transfer case, shift the transfer case lever to the desired position. • With electronic shift transfer case, push and hold the transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button until the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns off. After the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns off, release the NEUTRAL (N) button. After the NEUTRAL (N) button has been released, the transfer case will shift to the position indicated by the selector switch. NOTE: When shifting the transfer case out of NEUTRAL (N), the engine should remain OFF to avoid gear clash. 6. Shift automatic transmission into PARK. 7. Release the brake pedal (and clutch pedal on a manual transmission). 8. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle. 9. Start the engine. 5 424 STARTING AND OPERATING 10. Press and hold the brake pedal. 11. Release the parking brake. 12. Shift the transmission into gear, release the brake pedal (and clutch pedal on manual transmissions), and check that the vehicle operates normally. NOTE: With electronic shift transfer case: • Steps three through five are requirements that must be met before pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must continue to be met until the shift has been completed. If any of these requirements are not met before pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will flash continuously until all requirements are met or until the NEUTRAL (N) button is released. • The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode for a shift to take place and for the position indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition is not in the ON/RUN mode, the shift will not take place and no position indicator lights will be on or flashing. • A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light indicates that shift requirements have not been met. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS 䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . . .426 ▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437 䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . .426 䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439 䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS . .427 䡵 EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED . . .440 ▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427 䡵 GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441 䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . . .429 䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . .442 ▫ 4500/5500 Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430 ▫ Two-Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443 ▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430 ▫ Four-Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444 ▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430 䡵 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444 䡵 HOISTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435 䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . .436 ▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436 䡵 EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . .444 6 426 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the upper switch bank just below the radio. Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers. This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists. When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position. NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery. IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations, you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action. • On the highways — slow down. • In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle speed while preventing vehicle motion with the brakes. NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition: • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A/C off can help remove this heat. • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system. WARNING! You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 427 CAUTION! Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT (H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly calibrated torque wrench. Torque Specifications Lug Nut/Bolt Torque Lug Nut/ Bolt Type **Lug Nut/Bolt Size 120-150 Ft-Lbs (160-200 N·m) 130-160 Ft-Lbs (190-220 N·m) Cone M14 x 1.50 Lug Nut/ Bolt Socket Size 22 mm Flanged **Use only your authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/ bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening. Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles. 6 428 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES NOTE: Dual wheels are flat mounted, center piloted. The lug nuts are a two-piece assembly. When the tires are being rotated or replaced, clean these lug nuts and add two drops of oil at the interface between the hex and the washer. Wheel Mounting Surface Two-Piece Lug Nut Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts. Retighten the wheel nuts in the same sequence to the torques listed in the table. Go through the sequence a second time to verify that specific torque has been achieved. Retighten to specifications after 25 miles (40 km) and check the lug nut/bolt torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated against the wheel. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 429 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING! 8/10 Lug Nuts/Bolts Torque Patterns 1 — 10 Bolt Pattern 2 — 8 Bolt Pattern WARNING! To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury. • Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel. • Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You could be crushed. Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. • Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift. • The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas. 6 430 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 4500/5500 Models 5. Turn OFF the ignition. These vehicles do not come equipped with a jack. 6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally opposite of the jacking position. For example, if changing the right front tire, block the left rear wheel. NOTE: Jacking and tire changing on 4500/5500 models should be performed by an authorized dealer, or knowledgeable service personnel with the appropriate heavy duty equipment, like a tire service company. Preparations For Jacking 1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or slippery areas. WARNING! Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel. 2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. 3. Apply the parking brake. 4. Place the gear selector into PARK (automatic transmission) or REVERSE (manual transmission). On 4-Wheel drive vehicles, shift the transfer case to the “4L” position. NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked. Jacking Instructions Instructions WARNING! Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle: • Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle. • Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. • Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised. (Continued) WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 431 WARNING! (Continued) • Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in REVERSE. • Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack. • Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack. • Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift. • Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change. • If working on or near a roadway, be extremely careful of motor traffic. • To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground. 6 Jack Warning Label CAUTION! Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle. 1. If equipped, remove the spare wheel, jack, and tools from storage. 2. Using the wheel wrench, loosen, but do not remove, the wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the ground. 432 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 3. When changing the front wheel, assemble the jack drive tube to the jack and connect the drive tube to the extension tube. Place the jack under the axle as close to the tire as possible with the drive tubes extending to the front. Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench. Rear Jacking Location Before raising the wheel off the ground, make sure that the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts and adjust the jack position as required. Front Jacking Locations When changing a rear wheel, assemble the jack drive tube to the jack and connect the drive tube to the extension tube. Securely place the jack under the sway bar bracket (unless both tires are flat on one side, then place jack under shock bracket) facing forward in vehicle. Connect the jack tube extension and lug wrench. NOTE: If the jack will not lower by turning the dial (thumbwheel) by hand, it may be necessary to use the jack drive tube in order to lower the jack. 4. By rotating the wheel wrench clockwise, raise the vehicle until the wheel just clears the surface. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 433 WARNING! WARNING! Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle unstable. It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire. A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could injure someone in the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the extra tire and wheel in the places provided. 5. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel off. Install the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the nuts toward the wheel on single rear wheel (SRW) models. On dual rear wheel models (DRW) the lug nuts are a two-piece assembly with a flat face. Lightly tighten the nuts. To avoid risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not fully tighten the nuts until the vehicle has been lowered. 7. Install wheel center cap (if equipped) and remove wheel blocks. Do not install chrome or aluminum wheel center caps on the spare wheel. This may result in cap damage. 6. Using the wheel wrench, finish tightening the nuts using a crisscross pattern. For the proper lug nut torque specifications refer to “Wheel and Tire Torque Specifications” in this section. If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service station. 8. Lower the jack to its fully closed position. If the jack will not lower by turning the dial (thumbwheel) by hand, it may be necessary to use the jack drive tube in order to lower the jack. Stow the replaced tire, jack, and tools as previously described. 9. Adjust the tire pressure when possible. 6 434 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Hub Caps/Wheel Covers — If Equipped The hub caps must be removed before raising the vehicle off the ground. CAUTION! Use extreme caution when removing the front and rear center caps. Damage can occur to the center cap and/or the wheel if screwdriver type tools are used. A pulling motion, not a pry off motion, is recommended to remove the caps. For single rear wheel (SRW) models, use the flat blade on the end of the lug wrench to pull the hub cap off. Insert the blade end into the pull off notch and carefully pull the hub cap off with a back and forth motion. On 3500 models with dual rear wheels (DRW), you must first remove the hub caps. The jack handle driver has a hook at one end that will fit in the pull off notch of the rear hub caps. Position the hook and pull straight out on the ratchet firmly. The hub cap should pop off. The wheel skins can now be removed. For the front hub cap, use the flat blade on the end of the lug wrench to pull the caps off. The wheel skin can now be removed. CAUTION! • Use a pulling motion to remove the hub cap. Do not use a twisting motion when removing the hub cap, damage to the hub cap; finish may occur. • The rear hub caps on the dual rear wheel has two pull off notches. Make sure that the hook of the jack handle driver is located squarely in the cap notch before attempting to pull off. You must use the flat end of the lug wrench to pull off the wheel skins. Locate the hub cap pull notches (2 notches on each cap). Insert the flat tip completely and using a back and forth motion, loosen the wheel skin. Repeat this procedure around the tire until the skin pops off. Replace the wheel skins first using a rubber mallet. When replacing the hub caps, tilt the cap retainer over the lug nut bolt circle and strike the high side down with a rubber mallet. Be sure that the hub caps and wheel skins are firmly seated around the wheel. Dual Rear Wheels Slots in the wheels will assist in properly orienting the inner and outer wheels. Align these slots when assembling the wheels for best access to the tire valve on the inner WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 435 wheel. The tires of both dual wheels must be completely off the ground when tightening to insure wheel centering and maximum wheel clamping. Dual wheel models require a special heavy-duty lug nut tightening adapter (included with the vehicle) to correctly tighten the lug nuts. Also, when it is necessary to remove and install dual rear wheels, use a proper vehicle lifting device. NOTE: When installing a spare tire (if equipped) as part of a dual rear wheel end combination, the tire diameter of the two individual tires must be compared. If there is a significant difference, the larger tire should be installed in a front location. The correct direction of rotation for dual tire installations must also be observed. It is recommended that wheel stud nuts be kept torqued to specifications at all times. Torque wheel stud nuts to specifications at each lubrication interval. Wheel Nuts All wheel nuts should be tightened occasionally to eliminate the possibility of wheel studs being sheared or the bolt holes in the wheels becoming elongated. This is especially important during the first few hundred miles/kilometers of operation to allow the wheel nuts to become properly set. All wheel nuts should first be firmly seated against the wheel. The wheel nuts should then be tightened to recommended torque. Tighten the wheel nuts to final torque in increments. Progress around the bolt circle, tightening the wheel nut opposite to the wheel nut just previously tightened until final torque is achieved. To Stow The Flat Or Spare — If Equipped Refer to Upfitters Body Builders Guide for information on stowing your spare tire (if equipped). HOISTING A conventional floor jack may be used at the jacking locations. Refer to the graphics that show jacking locations. However, a floor jack or frame hoist must never be used on any other parts of the underbody. CAUTION! Never use a floor jack directly under the differential housing of a loaded truck or damage to your vehicle may result. 6 436 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack. Jumpstarting can be dangerous if done improperly, so please follow the procedures in this section carefully. NOTE: The positive battery post may be covered with a protective cap if equipped. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the positive battery post. Do not jump off fuses. Only jump directly off positive post which has a positive (+) symbol on or around the post. NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions. WARNING! Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury. CAUTION! Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical system may occur. Preparations For Jump-Start The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly. Correct Positive Jumping Location WARNING! • Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan blades. (Continued) WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 437 WARNING! (Continued) • Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be seriously injured. • Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery. 1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK. 2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories. 3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF. WARNING! Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result. Jump-Starting Procedure WARNING! Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion. CAUTION! Failure to follow these procedures could result in damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle. Connecting The Jumper Cables 1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle. NOTE: Do not jump off fuses. Only jump directly off positive post. 2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery. 3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the booster battery. 6 438 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery and the fuel injection system. WARNING! Disconnecting The Jumper Cables 1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable from the engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery. 2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery. 3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery. Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury. Only use the specific ground point, do not use any other exposed metal parts. 4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery. 5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery. If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system inspected at your authorized dealer. CAUTION! CAUTION! Do not connect jumper cable to any of the fuses on the positive battery terminal. The resulting electrical current will blow the fuse. Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting. 6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence: WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 439 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels. Next, shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or 2nd gear and REVERSE (with manual transmission) while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels or racing the engine. CAUTION! Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of clutch or transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle. NOTE: Push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode, before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode. WARNING! Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. 6 440 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CAUTION! WARNING! • When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE/SECOND GEAR and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result. • Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring). • Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious injury or death. • Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged, causing serious injury. EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency tow hooks. NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of damage to the vehicle. CAUTION! Tow hooks are for emergency use only to rescue a vehicle stranded off-road. Do not use tow hooks for tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could damage your vehicle. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 441 GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector cannot be moved out of the PARK position, you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the gear selector: 1. Turn the engine OFF. 2. Firmly apply the parking brake. 3. Tilt the steering wheel to the full up position. 6 4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal. 5. Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the access port (ringed circle) on the bottom of the steering column, and push and hold the override release lever up. Gear Selector Override Access Port 6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL position. 7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL. 442 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service. If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles may Towing Condition Flat Tow Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow Flatbed Wheels OFF The Ground NONE also be towed as described under “Recreational Towing” in the “Starting and Operating” section. 2WD Models 4WD Models If transmission is operable: • Transmission in NEUTRAL • 30 mph (48 km/h) max speed • 15 miles (24 km) max distance Front Rear OK ALL BEST METHOD Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main See instructions in “Recreational Towing” under “Starting and Operating” • Auto Transmission in PARK • Manual Transmission in gear ( NOT NEUTRAL) • Transfer Case in NEUTRAL • Tow in forward direction NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED BEST METHOD structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 443 If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode, not the ACC mode. If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle’s battery is discharged, refer to “Gear Selector Override” in this section for instructions on shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK for towing. CAUTION! • Do not use sling type equipment when towing. Vehicle damage may occur. • When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do not attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing. Two-Wheel Drive Models The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed. If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission is operable, the vehicle may be towed (with the rear wheels on the ground) under the following conditions: • The transmission must be in NEUTRAL. • The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). • The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km). If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than 15 miles (24 km), tow with the rear wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed, or with the front wheels raised and the rear wheels on a towing dolly, or (when using a suitable steering wheel stabilizer to hold the front wheels in the straight position) with rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the ground. CAUTION! Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe engine and/or transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. 6 444 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Four-Wheel Drive Models The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and the opposite end on a towing dolly. If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transfer case is operable, the vehicle may be towed (in the forward direction, with ALL wheels on the ground), IF the transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N) and the transmission is in PARK (for automatic transmissions) or in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL, for manual transmissions). Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for further information and detailed instructions. CAUTION! • Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used. Internal damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when towing. • Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS) This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Accident Response System. Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information on the Enhanced Accident Response System (EARS) function. EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information on the Event Data Recorder (EDR). MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS 䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.4L . . . . . . . . . . .447 ▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459 䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II) . . . .448 ▫ Front Prop Shaft Lubrication — Four-Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465 ▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448 ▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466 ▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . .449 ▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466 䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449 ▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469 䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450 䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450 䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . .451 ▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470 ▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471 ▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475 ▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451 ▫ Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle Fluid Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476 ▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453 ▫ Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477 ▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454 ▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . .478 ▫ Accessory Drive Belt Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . .456 ▫ Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480 ▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458 7 446 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486 ▫ Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487 䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493 䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494 䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495 ▫ Base Quad / Premium Bi-Halogen: Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, Front Park And Turn — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495 ▫ Fog Lamps — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496 ▫ Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) With Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497 ▫ Cab Top Clearance Lamps — If Equipped . . . . .498 䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500 䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501 ▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501 ▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 447 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.4L 7 1 2 3 4 5 — — — — — Coolant Pressure Bottle Transmission Dipstick Engine Oil Fill Engine Oil Dipstick Brake Fluid Reservoir 6 — Battery 7 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Washer Solvent 9 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 10 — Air Cleaner Filter 448 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II) Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations. Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to information related to the performance of your emissions controls. Authorized service technicians may need to access this information to assist with the diagnosis and service of your vehicle and emissions system. If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. WARNING! CAUTION! • Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system. It could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests can be performed. • If the MIL is flashing, while the engine is running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required. • ONLY an authorized service technician should connect equipment to the OBD II connection port in order to diagnose or service your vehicle. • If unauthorized equipment is connected to the OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior tracking device, it may: • Be possible that vehicle systems, including safety related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in an accident involving serious injury or death. • Access, or allow others to access, information stored in your vehicle systems, including personal information. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 449 For further information, refer to “Privacy Practices — If Equipped With Uconnect 8.4 Radio” and “Uconnect CyberSecurity” in “All About Uconnect Access” in your Owner’s Manual Radio Supplement and “Cybersecurity” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”. EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system is ready for testing. If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator will display in the instrument cluster telltale display area. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and push the SELECT button to turn off the message. If the problem continues, the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started. A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system. Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration. Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced, or recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test. Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the following: 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON mode, but do not crank or start the engine. NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start this test over. 7 450 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition to the ON mode, you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check. 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will happen: • The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you cycle the ignition OFF or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I/M station. • The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you place the ignition in the off position or start the engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station. If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update. A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready. Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running. REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal/scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures caused by the use of non-MOPAR parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself. NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 451 WARNING! CAUTION! (Continued) You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized dealer or qualified repair center. • Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine, transmission, or air conditioning. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of component malfunction, use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure. MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle. Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed “Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future. Engine Oil Checking Oil Level CAUTION! • Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs, damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately (Continued) To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine, the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off. 7 452 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the top of the safe zone on these engines. CAUTION! Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause oil aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine. Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further information. NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8,000 miles (13,000 km), twelve months or 350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet customers. Engine Oil Selection — 6.4L Engine For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-12633. American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils. This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W30, 5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils. CAUTION! Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 453 Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 6.4L Engine Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Use MOPAR SAE 0W-40 engine oil approved to FCA Material Standard MS-12633 such as Pennzoil Ultra equivalent is recommended for all operating temperatures. Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area. The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compartment” illustration in this section. Engine Oil Filter Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used. The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter at every engine oil change. Synthetic Engine Oils The manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high-quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine oil filters are a high-quality oil filter and are recommended. You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed. Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used. Engine Oil Filter Selection 7 454 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. WARNING! The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury. Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and Replacement Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or debris, if you find evidence of either dirt or debris you should change your air cleaner filter. Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal 1. Release the spring clips from the air cleaner cover. Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended. Air Cleaner Filter Cover 1 — Clean Air Hose Clamp 2 — Spring Clips MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 455 2. Lift the air cleaner cover to access the air cleaner filter. 3. Remove the air cleaner filter element from the housing assembly. 7 Open Air Cleaner Filter Assembly 1 — Air Cleaner Cover 2 — Air Cleaner Filter Air Cleaner Filter 1 — Air Cleaner Filter 2 — Air Cleaner Filter Inspection Surface 456 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation NOTE: Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is present before replacing the air filter element. 1. Install the air cleaner filter element into the housing assembly with the air cleaner filter inspection surface facing downward. 2. Install the air cleaner cover onto the housing assembly locating tabs. 3. Latch the spring clips and lock the air cleaner cover to the housing assembly. Accessory Drive Belt Inspection WARNING! • Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt with vehicle running. • When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time regardless of ignition mode. You could be injured by the moving fan blades. • You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 457 When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks that run across ribbed surface of belt from rib to rib, are considered normal. These are not a reason to replace belt. However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are not normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive wear, frayed cords or severe glazing. Conditions that would require replacement: • Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from belt body) • Rib or belt wear • Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs) • Belt slips • “Groove jumping⬙ (belt does not maintain correct position on pulley) • Belt broken (identify and correct problem before new belt is installed) • Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is heard or felt while drive belt is in operation) Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully inspected for damage and proper alignment. Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt) Belt replacement on some models requires the use of special tools, we recommend having your vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer. 7 458 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Maintenance-Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required. WARNING! • Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information. • Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other. • Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling. CAUTION! • It is essential when replacing the cables on the battery that the positive cable is attached to the positive post and the negative cable is attached to the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion. • If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 459 Air Conditioner Maintenance For best possible performance, your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start of each warm season. This service should include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time. WARNING! • Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD, for further warranty information. • The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced technician. CAUTION! Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a — If Equipped R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment. NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG compressor oil and refrigerants. 7 460 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R1234yf — If Equipped R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoolefine HFO that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product with a low GWP (Global Warming Potential). However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment. NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG compressor oil and refrigerants. Cabin Filter Replacement (A/C Air Filter) Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. WARNING! Do not remove the cabin air filter while the vehicle is running, or while the ignition is in the ACC or ON/ RUN mode. With the cabin air filter removed and the blower operating, the blower can contact hands and may propel dirt and debris into your eyes, resulting in personal injury. The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the glove compartment. Perform the following procedure to replace the filter: 1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 461 2. With the glove compartment door open, remove the glove compartment tension tether and tether clip by sliding the clip toward the face of the glove compartment door. Lift the clip out of glove compartment door and release into dash panel. 3. There are glove compartment travel stops on both sides of the glove compartment door, push inward on both sides of the glove compartment to release the glove compartment travel stops. 7 Glove Compartment Right Side Of Glove Compartment 1 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether 2 — Glove Compartment Door 1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stops 2 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether 3 — Glove Compartment Door 4. Disengage the glove compartment door from its hinges by opening the glove compartment past the travel stop and pulling the it toward you. 462 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 5. Remove the filter cover by pushing in on the finger tabs on each end of the filter cover. Finger Tabs Filter Cover MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 463 7 Finger Tab Cabin Air Filter 6. Remove the cabin air filter by pulling it straight out of the housing. 7. Install the cabin air filter with the arrow on the filter pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter cover, press on each end until you hear an audible click. CAUTION! The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure to properly install the filter will result in the need to replace it more often. 464 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 8. Reinstall the glove compartment on the hinges. Right Side Of Glove Compartment Glove Compartment Installation 9. Pull the tension tether outward and reinstall the glove compartment past the travel stops by pushing in on the glove compartment sides. 1 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether 2 — Glove Compartment Travel Stop NOTE: Ensure the glove compartment door hinges and glove compartment travel stops are fully engaged. 10. Reattach the glove compartment tension tether by inserting the tether clip in the glove compartment and sliding the clip away from the face of the glove compartment door. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 465 Front Prop Shaft Lubrication — Four-Wheel Drive Models Lubricate the front driveshaft grease fitting at each oil change. The grease fitting is located at the rear of the front driveshaft, near the centering mechanism of double cardan joint. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. Use MOPAR Type MS-6560 (lithium-based grease), or equivalent. 7 Front Drive Shaft Double Cardan Joint Double Cardan Joint 1 — Double Cardan Joint 2 — Grease Fitting 3 — Exploded View – Grease Fitting 466 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated. The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder. Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield. Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc. NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering, marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary. The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected periodically, not just when wiper performance problems are experienced. This inspection should include the following points: • Wear Or Uneven Edges • Foreign Material Windshield Wiper Blades • Hardening Or Cracking Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film. • Deformation Or Fatigue If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 467 Wiper Blade Removal/Installation 2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm, flip up the locking tab. CAUTION! Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against the glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass may be damaged. 1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position. 7 Wiper Locking Assembly 1 — Wiper 2 — Locking Tab Windshield Wiper Arm 1 — Wiper 2 — Locking Tab 3 — Wiper Arm 468 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3. Tilt the lower end of the wiper blade away from the arm and use one finger push the release tab toward the wiper arm. 5. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm by holding the wiper arm with one hand and separating the wiper blade from the wiper arm with the other hand (move the wiper blade down toward the base of the wiper arm and away from the J hook in the end of the wiper arm). Wiper Disengaging 1 — Locking Tab 2 — Wiper 3 — Release Tab 4. Slide the wiper blade down towards the base of the wiper arm. Removing Wiper From Wiper Arm 1 — Wiper 2 — Locking Tab 3 — Wiper Arm J Hook 6. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 469 Installing The Front Wipers 1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position. 2. Position the wiper blade under the hook on the tip of the wiper arm with the wiper locking tab open. 3. Insert the receiver bracket on the wiper assembly into the hook on the tip of the arm through the opening in the wiper blade under the locking tab. 4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper arm until it is latched (engagement will be accompanied by an audible click). Fold down the latch release tab and snap it into its locked position. 5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass. Adding Washer Fluid The fluid reservoir is located under the hood and should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze). When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper blades clean. This will help blade performance. To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers. WARNING! Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution. After the engine has warmed up, operate the defroster for a few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or freezing the fluid on the cold windshield. Windshield washer solution used with water as directed on the container, aids cleaning action, reduces the freezing point to avoid line clogging, and is not harmful to paint or trim. 7 470 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Exhaust System WARNING! (Continued) The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system. If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required. WARNING! • Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information. (Continued) • A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn. Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn. CAUTION! • The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine. • Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat, resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 471 Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage. NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you. In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately. Cooling System WARNING! You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot. Engine Coolant Checks • Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle. Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in appearance, the system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front of the A/C condenser (if equipped) or radiator for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the A/C condenser (if equipped) or the back of the radiator core. • Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions. Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks. To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage: • Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition, when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion. 7 472 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT. Cooling System — Drain Flush And Refill If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of old engine coolant (antifreeze). Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. Selection Of Coolant Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. CAUTION! • Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic (Continued) CAUTION! (Continued) Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. • Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the engine coolant and may plug the radiator. • This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended. Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000 miles MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 473 (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle. NOTE: Please review these recommendations for using Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze): • Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to the system, please contact your local authorized dealer. • We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032. • Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F (−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact your authorized dealer for assistance. • Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system. • It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated. • Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency, have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as possible. Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that the engine coolant (antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant expansion bottle. The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces. 7 474 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! • Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure. • Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result. Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately. Checking Coolant Level — 6.4L Engine The level of the coolant in the pressurized coolant bottle should be between the “MIN” and “MAX” range on the bottle when the engine is cold. The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is no need to remove the cap unless checking for coolant freeze point or replacing engine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month. When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill. Points To Remember NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/ kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator. If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate. • Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 475 • Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion bottle must also be protected against freezing. • If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are required, the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks. • Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components. • Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed. • Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the condenser clean. • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions. Brake System In order to assure brake system performance, all brake system components should be inspected periodically. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. WARNING! Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake damage. You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency. Brake Fluid Level Check The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked when performing under the hood service or immediately if the brake system warning lamp indicates system failure. The brake master cylinder has a translucent plastic reservoir. On the outboard side of the reservoir, there is a “MAX” mark and a “MIN” mark. The fluid level must be kept within these two marks. Do not add fluid above the MAX mark because leakage may occur at the cap. 7 476 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE With disc brakes the fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake linings wear. However, an unexpected drop in fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check should be conducted. Use only the manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. WARNING! • Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely damage your brake system and/or impair its performance. The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir. • To avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may cause it (Continued) WARNING! (Continued) to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could result in a collision. • Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces. • Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure. This could result in a collision. Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle Fluid Level For models with 9.25 in Front Axles and 11.5 in Rear Axles, refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons, the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected. When checking the fluid level (4500/5500 only), the vehicle should be in a level position. The fluid level should be ¼ in MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 477 ± ¼ in (6.4 mm ± 6.4 mm) below the fill hole on the front axle. The fluid level should be level with the bottom of the fill hole on the rear axle. Lubricant Selection Drain And Refill NOTE: The presence of water in the gear lubricant will result in corrosion and possible failure of differential components. Operation of the vehicle in water, as may be encountered in some off-highway types of service, will require draining and refilling the axle to avoid damage. On 4500/5500 vehicles, remove the lower bolt to drain the axle fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. Limited-Slip Differentials DO NOT REQUIRE any limited slip oil additive (friction modifiers). NOTE: Slight noise and mild shuddering may be evident while turning a vehicle with limited slip differential on concrete or dry pavement. These conditions should be considered normal operation of the limited slip differential. Transfer Case Drain And Refill 4500/5500 Rear Axle Plugs 1 — 4500/5500 Rear Axle Fluid Fill Plug 2 — 4500/5500 Rear Axle Fluid Drain Plug Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. Lubricant Selection Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. 7 478 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Fluid Level Check CAUTION! (Continued) This fluid level can be checked by removing the filler plug. The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the filler plug hole with the vehicle in a level position. Automatic Transmission — If Equipped Selection Of Lubricant It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level using the recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should be used. CAUTION! Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter shudder, and will require more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Technical Specifications” for fluid specifications. Special Additives The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any special additives in the transmission. Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals. CAUTION! Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 479 Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level when the engine is fully warmed up and the transmission fluid is at normal operating temperature. Driving with an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the transmission and of the fluid. Check the fluid level whenever the vehicle is serviced. Fluid Level Check — Procedure It is best to check the fluid level when the transmission is at normal operating temperature (170-180°F / 77-82°C for 66RFE transmission, or 158–176°F / 70–80°C for AS66RC transmission). This normally occurs after at least 15 miles (25 km) of driving. At normal operating temperature the fluid cannot be held comfortably between the fingertips. You can read the transmission sump temperature in the instrument cluster display (refer to ⬙Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information). Use the following procedure to check the transmission fluid level properly: 1. Monitor the transmission temperature using the instrument cluster display, and operate the vehicle as required to reach the normal operating temperature. If the transmission is not functioning properly, or the vehicle cannot be driven, see the NOTE and CAUTION below about checking the fluid level at colder temperatures. 2. Park the vehicle on level ground. 3. Run the engine at normal idle speed for at least 60 seconds, and leave the engine running for the rest of this procedure. 4. Fully apply the parking brake and press the brake pedal. 5. Place the gear selector momentarily into each gear position (allowing time for the transmission to fully engage in each position), ending with the transmission in PARK. 6. Wipe the area around the dipstick clean to prevent dirt from entering the transmission. 7. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert it until seated. 8. Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on both sides. The fluid level reading is only valid if there is a solid coating of oil on both sides of the dipstick. Note that the holes in the dipstick will be full of fluid if the actual level is at or above the hole. The fluid level should be between the “HOT” (upper) reference holes on the dipstick at normal operating temperature. If the 7 480 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE fluid level is low, add fluid through the dipstick tube to bring it to the proper level. Do not overfill. Use ONLY the specified fluid (see ⬙Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts⬙ for fluid specifications). After adding any quantity of oil through the dipstick tube, wait a minimum of two minutes for the oil to fully drain into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level. NOTE: If it is necessary to check the transmission below the operating temperature, the fluid level should be between the two “COLD” (lower) holes on the dipstick with the fluid at 60-70°F / 16-21°C for 66RFE transmission, or 68-86°F / 20-30°C for AS66RC transmission. Only use the COLD region of the dipstick as a rough reference when setting the fluid level after a transmission service or fluid change. Re-check the fluid level, and adjust as required, once the transmission reaches normal operating temperature. CAUTION! If the fluid temperature is below 50°F (10°C) it may not register on the dipstick. Do not add fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to produce an accurate reading. Run the engine at idle, in PARK, to warm the fluid. 9. Reinsert the dipstick. Check for leaks. Release the parking brake. NOTE: To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission after checking or replenishing fluid, make sure that the dipstick cap is properly reseated. It is normal for the dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated position, as long as its seal remains engaged in the dipstick tube. Fluid And Filter Changes — Six Speed Transmission Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals. In addition, change the fluid and filter(s) if the fluid becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason. Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 481 surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection. The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle. What Causes Corrosion? • If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove. • Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint. • Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish. Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle. The most common causes are: • Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation. • Stone and gravel impact. • Insects, tree sap and tar. • Salt in the air near seacoast localities. • Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants. Washing • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water. CAUTION! • Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch metal and painted surfaces. • Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and decals. Special Care • If you drive on salted or dusty roads, or if you drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once a month. 7 482 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and open. mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle. • If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner. Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them from corroding and tarnishing. • If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause that destroys the paint and protective coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner. • If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed. • If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel. • Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle. Wheel And Wheel Trim Care All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using NOTE: Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong acids or strong alkaline additives that can harm the wheel surface. CAUTION! Avoid products or automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh brushes. These products and automatic car washes may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 483 When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment, Mopar Chrome Cleaner, or their equivalent is recommended or select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels. Do not use any products on Dark Vapor or Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. CAUTION! Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended. NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing so. Driving the vehicle and applying the brakes when stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor corrosion. Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels CAUTION! If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that is required to maintain this finish. Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner: • Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean, dry towel. • Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel. • For tough stains, apply MOPAR Total Clean, or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. 7 484 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE • For grease stains, apply MOPAR Multi-Purpose Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. • Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products. Interior Care Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting. Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery. MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery. Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition. WARNING! Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm. CAUTION! • Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic, painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately. • Damage caused by these type of products may not be covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty. • Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as damage to the seat may result. Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights. Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 485 To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing. 1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may be used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp cloth. Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses. 2. Dry with a soft cloth. Glass Surfaces Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner, or any commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements. When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror. Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic. Seat Belt Maintenance If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth. Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly. NOTE: If the belts retract slowly, inspect the upper turning loop for soiling. If soiling is present, clean with a wet soft cloth until all residue is removed. 7 486 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING! A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). FUSES WARNING! • When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage. • Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition is off and that all the other services are switched off and/or disengaged. • If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer. • If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air bag system, braking system), power unit systems (engine system, gearbox system) or steering system blows, contact an authorized dealer. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 487 Power Distribution Center The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine compartment near the battery. This center contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and circuit breakers. A description of each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover, otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart. 7 Power Distribution Center Location Cavity F01 F03 F05 F06 Cartridge Fuse 80 Amp Black 60 Amp Yellow 40 Amp Green 40 Amp Green Micro Fuse – – – – F07 F08 40 Amp Green 20 Amp Blue (1500 LD/ Cummins Diesel) – – Description Rad Fan Control Module – If Equipped Rad Fan – If Equipped Compressor for Air Suspension – If Equipped Antilock Brakes/Electronic Stability Control Pump Starter Solenoid Emissions Diesel – If Equipped 488 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity F09 F10 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F16 F19 F20 F21 F22 Cartridge Fuse 40 Amp Green (Special Services Vehicle & Cummins Diesel) 40 Amp Green 50 Amp Red Micro Fuse – Description Diesel Fuel Heater – If Equipped – – 30 Amp Pink 40 Amp Green 40 Amp Green 40 Amp Green 30 Amp Pink 20 Amp Blue (1500 LD Diesel) 30 Amp Pink (Cummins Diesel) 30 Amp Pink 30 Amp Pink 20 Amp Blue 30 Amp Pink (Cummins Diesel) – – – – – – Body Controller / Exterior Lighting #2 Body Controller / Exterior Lighting #2 – If Equipped with Stop/Start Integrated Trailer Brake Module – If Equipped Body Controller #3 / Power Locks Blower Motor Body Controller #4 / Interior Lighting Smart Bar – If Equipped SCR – If Equipped – – – Passenger Door Module Drive Train Control Module Engine Control Module MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 489 Cavity F23 F24 F25 F26 Cartridge Fuse 30 Amp Pink 30 Amp Pink 30 Amp Pink 30 Amp Pink Micro Fuse – – – – F28 F29 F30 F31 – – – – F32 F33 F34 20 Amp Blue 20 Amp Blue 30 Amp Pink 30 Amp Pink (1500 LD Diesel) – 20 Amp Blue 30 Amp Pink F35 F36 F37 F38 F39 F41 30 Amp Pink 30 Amp Pink 30 Amp Pink 30 Amp Pink 20 Amp Blue – – – – – – 10 Amp Red – – – Description Body Controller #1 / Interior Lighting Driver Door Module Front Wiper Antilock Brakes / Stability Control Module / Valves Trailer Tow Backup Lights – If Equipped Trailer Tow Parking Lights – If Equipped Trailer Tow Receptacle Urea Heater Control – If Equipped Spare Fuse Special Services Vehicle Only Vehicle System Interface Module #2 – If Equipped Sunroof – If Equipped Rear Defroster – If Equipped Cummins Diesel Fuel Heater #2 – If Equipped Power Inverter 115V AC – If Equipped Power Outlet – Special Services Only Active Grill Shutter – If Equipped 7 490 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity F42 F44 F46 F49 F50 F51 Cartridge Fuse – – – – – – Micro Fuse 20 Amp Yellow 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red 20 Amp Yellow 10 Amp Red F52 F53 F54 F56 F57 F58 F59 F60 F61 – – – – – – – – – F62 – 5 Amp Tan 20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow 15 Amp Blue 20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow 10 Amp Red 15 Amp Blue 10 Amp Red (1500 LD Diesel & Cummins Diesel) 10 Amp Red Description Horn Diagnostic Port Upfitter – If Equipped Instrument Panel Cluster (Except Fleet Vehicles) Air Suspension Control Module – If Equipped Ignition Node Module / Keyless Ignition (Instrument Panel Cluster – Fleet Vehicles Only) Battery Sensor Trailer Tow – Left Turn/Stop Lights Adjustable Pedals Additional Diesel Content – If Equipped Transmission Spare Fuse SCR Relay – If Equipped Underhood Lamp PM Sensor – If Equipped Air Conditioning Clutch MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 491 Cavity F63 Cartridge Fuse – Micro Fuse 20 Amp Yellow F64 F65 F66 – – – 25 Amp Clear – 10 Amp Red F67 – 10 Amp Red F69 F70 F71 F72 F73 F74 – – – – – – F75 F76 F77 – – – 15 Amp Blue 30 Amp Green 25 Amp Clear 10 Amp Red 20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow (Gas Engine & 1500 LD Diesel) 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red Description Ignition Coils (Gas), Urea Heater (Cummins Diesel) Fuel Injectors / Powertrain Spare Fuse Sunroof / Passenger Window Switches / Rain Sensor CD / DVD / Bluetooth Hands-free Module – If Equipped Mod SCR 12V (Cummins Diesel) – If Equipped Fuel Pump Motor Amplifier PCM – If Equipped Fuel Transfer Pump (HD Only) – If Equipped Brake Vacuum Pump Gas/Diesel – If Equipped Coolant Temperature Valve Actuator Antilock Brakes / Electronic Stability Control Drivetrain Control Module/Front Axle Disconnect Module 7 492 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Cavity F78 Cartridge Fuse – Micro Fuse 10 Amp Red F79 F80 F81 F82 – – – – 15 Amp Blue 10 Amp Red 20 Amp Yellow 10 Amp Red F84 F85 F86 F87 – – – – 15 Amp Blue 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red F88 F90/F91 F93 F94 F95 F96 F97 – – – – – – – 15 Amp Blue 20 Amp Yellow 20 Amp Yellow 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red 25 Amp Clear Description Engine Control Module / Electric Power Steering Clearance Lights Universal Garage Door Opener / Compass Trailer Tow Right Turn / Stop Lights Steering Column Control Module / Cruise Control Switch Bank / Instrument Cluster Airbag Module Airbag Module Air Suspension – If Equipped / Trailer Tow / Steering Column Control Module Instrument Panel Cluster Power Outlet (Rear Seats) Customer Selectable Cigar Lighter Shifter / Transfer Case Module Rear Camera / Park Assist Rear Seat Heater Switch Rear Heated Seats & Heated Steering Wheel – If Equipped MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 493 Cavity F98 F99 F100 F101 Cartridge Fuse – – – – Micro Fuse 25 Amp Clear 10 Amp Red 10 Amp Red 15 Amp Blue F104 – 20 Amp Yellow CAUTION! • When installing the power distribution center cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure. • When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected. Description Front Heated Seats – If Equipped Climate Control Upfitters – If Equipped Electrochromatic Mirror / Smart High Beams – If Equipped Power Outlets (Instrument Panel / Center Console) VEHICLE STORAGE If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21 days, we recommend that you take the following steps to minimize the drain on your vehicle’s battery: • Disconnect the negative cable from battery. • Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again. 7 494 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE REPLACEMENT BULBS LIGHT BULBS — Interior Bulb Number Overhead Console Lamps TS 212-2 Dome Lamp 7679 For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions. LIGHT BULBS — Exterior Quad Headlamp – Low Beam Quad Headlamp – High Beam Quad Headlamp – Front Turn Signal Lamp Premium Headlamp – Low Beam Premium Headlamp – High Beam Bulb Number H11 9005 3157NA HIR2 9005 Premium Headlamp – Front Turn Signal Lamp Horizontal Fog Lamp Vertical Fog Lamp Cab Roof Marker Lamps Center High Mounted Stop Lamp Rear Cargo Lamp Box Off Tail Lamps – Stop/Turn/Tail/License Plate Box Off Tail Lamps – Back Up Bulb Number LED (See authorized dealer for service) 9145 9006 194NA 921 921 1157 1156 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 495 BULB REPLACEMENT 6. Remove the two headlamp assembly attachment screws. NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the clearing process. Base Quad / Premium Bi-Halogen: Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, Front Park And Turn — If Equipped 1. Open the hood. 7 2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable. 3. Remove the six plastic push-in fasteners that secure the upper radiator seal to the grille support and both fender ledges. 4. Remove the two plastic push-in rivets that secure the upper radiator seal to the radiator. 5. Remove the upper radiator seal from the vehicle. Headlamp Assembly Attachment Screw Locations 7. Reach into the front wheel house ahead of the front wheel, remove the fastener, and lift the cover over the access hole in the front of the wheel house splash shield. Access to the rear of the lamp can be gained through this access hole. 496 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 8. Reach through the access hole of the wheel house splash shield and lift the slide lock upward far enough to disengage it from the lock post on the back of the front lamp unit housing. CAUTION! • Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result. • Always use the correct bulb size and type for replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the bulb socket, or the lamp wiring. NOTE: There are access covers over both headlamp bulb access holes in the quad front lamp unit housing (if equipped). These covers MUST be reinstalled after the bulb has been replaced. Fog Lamps — If Equipped Slide Lock 9. Remove the headlamp assembly. Grasp the outboard edge of the lamp and pull it straight forward to disengage the ball stud from the plastic grommet. 10. Disconnect the wiring harness connectors from the bulb socket. 11. Replace bulb(s) as necessary. 1. Reach under and behind the front bumper to access the back of the front fog lamp housing. 2. Disconnect the fog lamp wiring harness connector from the fog lamp bulb. 3. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise ¼ turn to unlock the bulb from the housing. MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 497 4. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing. 2. Separate the connector holding the housing and wiring harness to the body. CAUTION! Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result. Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) With Cargo Lamp 1. Remove the two screws holding the housing/lens to the body as shown. 7 CHMSL Connector Location 3. Turn the desired bulb socket ¼ turn and remove the socket and bulb from housing. CHMSL Mounting Screw Locations 498 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 4. Pull the desired bulb straight from the socket. Cab Top Clearance Lamps — If Equipped 1. Remove the two screws from the top of the lamp. CHMSL Bulb And Socket CAUTION! Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result. • Outside Bulbs: Cargo Lamps • Inside Bulb: Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp 5. Reverse the procedure for installation of bulbs and housing. Removing Rear Screw From Clearance Lamp MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 499 2. Rotate the bulb socket ¼ turn and pull it from the lamp assembly. 3. Pull the bulb straight from it’s socket and replace. 7 Removing The Bulb From The Bulb Socket Removing Bulb Socket From Clearance Lamp 500 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE FLUID CAPACITIES Fuel (Approximate) Standard Rear Tank Optional Midship Tank Engine Oil With Filter 6.4L Engine (We recommend you use SAE 0W-40, Synthetic API Certified) Cooling System 6.4L Engine (We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/ 150,000 Mile Formula). U.S. Metric 52 Gallons 22 Gallons 197 Liters 83 Liters 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters 16.6 Quarts 15.7 Liters MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 501 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Engine Coolant Engine Oil – 6.4L Engine Engine Oil Filter – 6.4L Engine Spark Plugs – 6.4L Engine Fuel Selection – 6.4L Engine Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10–Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology). For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute (API) categories of SN. The manufacturer recommends the use of Pennzoil Ultra 0W-40 or equivalent MOPAR engine oil meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-12633 for use in all operating temperatures. We recommend you use MOPAR Engine Oil Filters. We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs. 89 Octane Recommended - 87 Octane Acceptable, 0-15% Ethanol. 7 502 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION! CAUTION! (Continued) • Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible. • Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator. • This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended. (Continued) MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 503 Chassis Component Automatic Transmission (6.4L Engine with 66RFE Transmission) (For Diesel Engine See Diesel Supplement) Automatic Transmission (6.4L Engine with AS66RC Transmission) Transfer Case Front and Rear Axle Fluid (4500/5500) Brake Master Cylinder Power Steering Reservoir Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part Use only ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid. Failure to use ATF+4 fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission. We recommend MOPAR ATF+4 fluid. Use only MOPAR ASRC Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent. Failure to use the proper fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission. We recommend you use MOPAR BW44-44 Transfer Case Fluid. We recommend you use GL-5 SAE 75W-90 Synthetic (MS-9763). Limited slip additive is not required for Limited-Slip Rear Axles. We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3 and SAE J1703. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. We recommend you use MOPAR Power Steering Fluid +4, MOPAR ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid. 7 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS 䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506 ▫ Maintenance Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507 8 506 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Gasoline Engines: Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system. The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 8,000 miles (13,000 km), twelve months or 350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet customers. Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will influence when the “Oil Change Required” message is displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km). Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Severe Duty: Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is operated predominately at idle or very low engine RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty. Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip: • Check engine oil level • Check windshield washer fluid level • Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual wear or damage • Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake master cylinder, power steering and automatic transmission, and fill as needed • Check function of all interior and exterior lights MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 507 Maintenance Chart Required Maintenance Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following pages for required maintenance. At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System: • Change oil and filter. • Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on. • Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required. • • • • • • At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System: Inspect automatic transmission fluid if equipped with dipstick. Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake. Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses. Inspect exhaust system. Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions. Lube the front drive shaft fitting. 8 Additional Inspections Inspect the CV/Universal joints. Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and replace if necessary. Inspect the front and rear axle surfaces. If gear oil leakage is suspected, check the fluid level. If using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing, change axle fluid. Inspect the brake linings, parking brake function. Additional Maintenance Replace engine air filter. Replace spark plugs. ** Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first. Change the automatic transmission fluid (AS66RC Transmission Only). 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000 Or Years: Or Kilometers: 20,000 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 32,000 508 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Change the automatic transmission fluid and sump filter (AS66RC Transmission Only). Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter(s) (66RFE Transmission Only), if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing. Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter(s) (66RFE transmission). Inspect the transfer case fluid, change for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing. Change the transfer case fluid. Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 110,000 120,000 130,000 140,000 150,000 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 48,000 64,000 80,000 96,000 112,000 128,000 144,000 160,000 176,000 192,000 208,000 224,000 240,000 Or Years: Or Kilometers: 20,000 Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first) 32,000 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 509 X X X X 8 X X ** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply. X X X X X X 510 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES WARNING! • You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. • Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident. IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS 䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512 ▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514 ▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512 ▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514 ▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515 ▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512 䡵 MOPAR PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515 䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . . .515 ▫ FCA USA LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . .513 ▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . .515 ▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center. . . . . . . . . . .513 ▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516 ▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513 䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . . .516 ▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands. . . . . . . . . .513 9 512 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you are having warranty work done, be sure to bring the right papers with you, as well as your warranty folder. All work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s service history, as this can often provide a clue to the current problem. Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service advisor know. Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment. IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our products and services. Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner. This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with this process. • If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer. They want to know if you need assistance. • If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer center. IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 513 Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer center should include the following information: • Owner’s name and address • Owner’s telephone number (home and office) • Authorized dealer name • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) • Vehicle delivery date and mileage FCA USA LLC Customer Center P.O. Box 21–8004 Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 Phone: (866) 726-4636 FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center P.O. Box 1621 Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French In Mexico Contact Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240 Sante Fe C.P. 05109 Mexico, D. F. In Mexico City: 5081-7568 Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300 Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC P.O. Box 191857 San Juan 00919-1857 Tel.: (787) 782-5757 Fax: (787) 782-3345 9 514 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY. Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator. Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have any questions about the service contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French). The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract, and you require service after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract documents, and contact the person listed in those documents. We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns. IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 515 WARNING! Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only), some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet, for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market. MOPAR PARTS MOPAR fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best. REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying FCA US LLC. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your authorized dealer or FCA US LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. 9 516 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE In Canada Diagnostic Procedure Manuals If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/. Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshooting and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests, and a complete list of all tools and equipment. PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals, you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call for an order form. NOTE: A street address is required when ordering manuals (no P.O. Boxes). Owner’s Manuals These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips. Service Manuals Call toll free at: These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintaining, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts. • 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.) • 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at: • www.techauthority.com INDEX 10 518 INDEX Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . .472 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400 Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399 Adjust Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111, 112 Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110, 111 Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110, 111 Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111, 112 Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 Air Bag Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64, 444 Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444 If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63 Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 Air Bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55, 92, 197 Air Bag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter). . . . . .454 Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277 Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277 Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291, 460 Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291 Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459, 460 Air Conditioning System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277, 290, 459 Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377 Alarm, Panic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20, 199 Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20 Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480 Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173 Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355 Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Automatic Door Locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 Automatic High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . . .290 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478 Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479 Fluid And Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480 Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479 INDEX 519 Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478, 503 Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327 Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478 Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476, 477, 503 Axle Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476, 477 Back-Up Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156 Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200, 458 Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200 Keyless Key Fob Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 Belts, Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 Body Builders Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466 B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371 Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355 Brake Control System, Electronic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353 Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475, 503 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352, 475 Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475 Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475 Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198 Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495 Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94, 494 Cab Top Clearance Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498 Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156 Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . .500 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500 Caps, Filler Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350 Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473 Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91, 400 Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Car Washes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481 Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497 Center Seat Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178 Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401 Chart, Tire Sizing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367 Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light). . . .449 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 Child Restraints Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 10 520 INDEX Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80, 81 How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . . . . .78 Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 Locating The LATCH Anchorages . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . . .73 Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . .70 Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Cigar Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173 Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397 Cleaning Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482 Climate Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277 Cold Weather Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323 Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275 Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381 Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514 Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap). . . . . . . . . . . . .473 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472 Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500 Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471, 474 Disposal Of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474 Drain, Flush, And Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474 Points To Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474 Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473 Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473 Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . .472, 501 Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480 Cruise Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216, 217, 218 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512 Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255 Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450 Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182 Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 Differential, Limited-Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346 Dipsticks Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350 Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442 Disposal Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474 Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314 Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203 Door Ajar Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203 INDEX 521 Door Locks Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161 Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348 Dual Rear Wheels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388, 427, 434 Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric Rear Window Defrost . . . . . . . . . Electronically Shifted Transfer Case . . . . . Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic Roll Mitigation . . . . . . . . . . Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic Range Select (ERS) . . . . . . . . . Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light Emergency Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168 .182 .342 .353 .353 .362 .358 .332 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 .358 .201 .350 Emergency, In Case Of Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436 Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440 Emission Control System Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . .449 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447 Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454 Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447 Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501 Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91, 400 Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436 Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451, 501 Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453 Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453 Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452 Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426 Engine Oil Viscosity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453 Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . .64, 444 Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Ethanol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397 10 522 INDEX Exhaust Exhaust Exterior Exterior Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91, 400 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91, 470 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94 Filters Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291, 460 Engine Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453, 501 Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453 Flashers Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94, 132, 216 Flat Tire Stowage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435 Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323 Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503 Fluid Capacities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500 Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479 Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350 Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . . .501 Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128, 212, 496 Fold Flat Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183 Four-Way Hazard Flasher. Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . Front Axle (Differential) . . Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding . . . . . . . . . . . Additives . . . . . . . . . . Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . Materials Added . . . . . Methanol . . . . . . . . . . Octane Rating . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . Tank Capacity . . . . . . . Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426 .338 .439 .476 .397 .400 .399 .397 .397 .401 .501 .397 .210 .399 .397 .397 .397 .500 .486 Garage Door Opener (HomeLink). . . . . . . . . . . .161, 166 Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401, 449 Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397 Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397 Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397 INDEX 523 Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327 Gear Select Lever Override. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441 Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485 Grocery Bag Retainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182 Gross Axle Weight Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404 Guide, Body Builders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402 Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . Hill Start Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hitches Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hoisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) . Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hub Caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355 Hazard Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348 Hazard Warning Flasher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484 High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . . . .133 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107, 182 Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277 High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . . .133 Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363 Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11, 15 Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99, 104 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200, 202, 216 Instrument Cluster Display Instrument Cluster Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218 Instrument Panel And Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485 Integrated Trailer Brake Controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411 Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484 Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129 Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408 .435 .161 .123 .434 10 524 INDEX Inverter Outlet (115V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173 Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436 Key Fob Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . .26 Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . .22 Key Fob, Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Key-In Reminder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35, 322 Lock The Vehicle’s Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244, 263 Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . .35, 244, 263 Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Key, Sentry (Immobilizer). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Lane Change And Turn Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94 Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397 Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94 Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383 Light Bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94, 124 Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55, 92, 197 Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361 Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494, 495 Cap Top Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498 Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497 Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130, 131, 160 Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216, 217, 218 Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126 Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200 Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94 Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128, 212, 496 Four-Wheel Drive Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129, 130, 131, 160 INDEX 525 Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210 Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . . .204 Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197 Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199 Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494, 495 Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . .208, 390 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361 Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341 Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94, 132, 216, 495 Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . .200, 216 Limited-Slip Differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346, 477 Loading Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371 Load Shed Battery Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 Battery Saver On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 Electrical Load Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 Intelligent Battery Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Low Tire Pressure System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390 Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466 Lug Nuts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427, 433, 434 Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458 Maintenance Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506 Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . . .204, 449 Manual, Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516 Manual Transmission Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478 Memory Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99, 104 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Monitor, Tire Pressure System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390 MOPAR Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450, 515 MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397 10 526 INDEX Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 Navigation System (Uconnect GPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156 New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397 Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451, 501 Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500 Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452 Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453 Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453, 501 Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453 Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452 Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201 Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452 Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453 Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453 Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453 Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201 Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448 Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448 Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overdrive OFF Switch . . . . . . . . . . Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .333 . . . . . . . . . . . . .333 . . . . . . . . . . . . .159 . . . . . . . . . . . . .426 . . . . . . . . . . .4, 516 Paint Care. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350 ParkSense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142, 150 Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 Pedals, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 Personalized Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293 Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 Placard, Tire And Loading Information . . . . . . . .371, 372 Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . .168, 173 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Sliding Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349, 350 INDEX 527 Take-Off Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336 Take-Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Power Seats Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111, 112 Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110, 111 Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110, 111 Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111, 112 Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503 Pregnant Women And Seat Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Pretensioners Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Programmable Electronic Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 Programming Key Fobs (Remote Keyless Entry). . . . . .22 PTO (Power Take-Off) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336 Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378 Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . .472, 473 Radio Frequency General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . .17, 19, 28, 31, 38 Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275 Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273 Rain Sensitive Wiper System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135 Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476, 477 Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142, 150 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182 Rear Window, Sliding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183 Reclining Rear Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 Recreational Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419 Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . .421 Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . .423 Reformulated Gasoline. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397 Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459, 460 Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Remote Control Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Remote Keyless Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22, 23 Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . . . .274 Remote Starting Uconnect Customer Programmable Features . .246, 266 Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246, 266 Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450 Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515 Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 10 528 INDEX Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94 Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515 Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91 Schedule, Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506 Seat Belt Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . . .48 Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . . . . . . . . . .53 Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42, 92 Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . . .48 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42, 46 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197 Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110, 111, 116 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110, 111 Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Folding Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183 Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 Reclining Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20, 199 Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501 Sentry Key Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512 Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514 Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516 Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 INDEX 529 Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327 Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341 Transfer Case, Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421 Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423 Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441 Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94, 132, 216 Siri . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311, 312 Sliding Rear Window Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385 Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380, 381, 382 Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501 Speed Control Accel/Decel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28, 321 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323 Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323 Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Starting Procedures (Gas Engines) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321 Steering Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349, 350 Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138 Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . . .274 Storage Compartment, Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178 Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291, 493 Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493 Sway Control, Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362 Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453 System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . . . .290 Tilt Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136 Tip Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322 Tire And Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . .371, 372 Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365 Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94, 376, 380, 389 10 530 INDEX Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383 Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371, 376 Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385 Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381 Dual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388, 427, 434 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376, 380 High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378 Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377 Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383 Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371, 373 Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . .390 Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208 Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389 Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384 Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365, 376 Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379 Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380, 381, 382 Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383 Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433 Tire Safety Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365 Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408 Torque Converter Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335 Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403, 442 Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442 Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408 Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419 Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408 Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . . .419 Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358 Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362 Trailer Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403 Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416 Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408 Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414 Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408 Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408 Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477 Electronically Shifted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327, 478 INDEX 531 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503 Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325 Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89 Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383 Turn Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132, 216, 495 Uconnect Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . .246, 266 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273 Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236 Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246, 266 Uconnect 8.4/8.4 NAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314 Uconnect 8.4 Settings Customer Programmable Features — Units . . . . . .258 Uconnect Access Vehicle Health Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307 Uconnect Settings Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . .35, 244, 263 Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . .35, 244, 263 Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244, 263 Uconnect Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294 Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389 Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) Programming HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . .162, 164, 165 Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373, 401 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291, 493 Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453 Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515 Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134, 469 Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481 Water Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348 Wheel And Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482 Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482 Wheel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434 Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433, 435 Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Window Fogging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Rear Sliding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183 Reset Auto-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 10 532 INDEX Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Windshield Defroster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93 Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133, 134, 469 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133, 469 Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 Wiper Blade Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466 Wipers, Intermittent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134 Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation. The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. This connection should not be fused. Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped. The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only fully shielded coaxial cable. Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR). Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions. All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the vehicle’s electronic systems. STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS® 17DD43-126-AB 17VF-126-AA ©2016 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. SECOND FIRST EDITION Edition Printed in U.S.A.
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : Yes Author : 2nd Edition CHECKINTOCM : Yes Create Date : 2016:09:06 17:41:26Z JOBNUMBER : 2351713 Job Path : Owners_Manual/2351713-en-2017_RAM_CHASSIS_CAB_OM_USA.17DD43-126-AB/Owners_Manual_v3 Keywords : 2351713 LANGUAGE : en Modify Date : 2016:12:01 10:34:45-06:00 Operator : tbrooks Publication Type : Owners_Manual Xpp File Process Date : August 11, 2016 Has XFA : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c005 78.147326, 2012/08/23-13:03:03 Checkintocm : Yes Language : en Jobnumber : 2351713 Producer : Acrobat Distiller 8.0.0 (Windows) Creator Tool : XPP Metadata Date : 2016:12:01 10:34:45-06:00 Format : application/pdf Title : 2017 RAM Commercial Chassis Cab Owner's Manual Description : 17DD43-126-AB Creator : 2nd Edition Subject : 2351713 Document ID : uuid:3e56256f-4df1-43aa-92dc-af63c53b0704 Instance ID : uuid:776c0e1e-971c-432c-b160-f4dd1479f6b7 Page Layout : SinglePage Page Mode : UseOutlines Page Count : 536EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools